| all | frequencies |
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| manuals | ||||||
| app s | submitted / available | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 2 |
|
User Manual I | Users Manual | 5.92 MiB | January 03 2010 | |||
| 1 2 |
|
User Manual II | Users Manual | 4.75 MiB | January 03 2010 | |||
| 1 2 |
|
User Manual III | Users Manual | 2.79 MiB | January 03 2010 | |||
| 1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | January 03 2010 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | January 03 2010 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Operational Description | January 03 2010 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | January 03 2010 | ||||||
| 1 2 | External Photos | January 03 2010 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Internal Photos | January 03 2010 | ||||||
| 1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | January 03 2010 | ||||||
| 1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | January 03 2010 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | January 03 2010 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Test Report | January 03 2010 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Test Setup Photos | January 03 2010 |
| 1 2 | User Manual I | Users Manual | 5.92 MiB | January 03 2010 |
Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide 72E-131700-01 Revision A March 2010 ii Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide 2009 by Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form, or by any electrical or mechanical means, without permission in writing from Motorola. This includes electronic or mechanical means, such as photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems. The material in this manual is subject to change without notice. The software is provided strictly on an as is basis. All software, including firmware, furnished to the user is on a licensed basis. Motorola grants to the user a non-transferable and non-exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder (licensed program). Except as noted below, such license may not be assigned, sublicensed, or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Motorola. No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted, except as permitted under copyright law. The user shall not modify, merge, or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material, create a derivative work from a licensed program, or use a licensed program in a network without written permission from Motorola. The user agrees to maintain Motorolas copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered hereunder, and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes, in whole or in part. The user agrees not to decompile, disassemble, decode, or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any portion thereof. Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability, function, or design. Motorola does not assume any product liability arising out of, or in connection with, the application or use of any product, circuit, or application described herein. No license is granted, either expressly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise under any Motorola, Inc., intellectual property rights. An implied license only exists for equipment, circuits, and subsystems contained in Motorola products. MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo and Symbol and the Symbol logo are registered in the US Patent & Trademark Office. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Microsoft, Windows and ActiveSync are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners. This media, or Motorola Product, may include Motorola Software, Commercial Third Party Software, and Publicly Available Software. The Motorola Software that may be included on this media, or included in the Motorola Product, is Copyright (c) by Motorola, Inc., and its use is subject to the licenses, terms and conditions of the agreement in force between the purchaser of the Motorola Product and Motorola, Inc. The Commercial Third Party Software that may be included on this media, or included in the Motorola Product, is subject to the licenses, terms and conditions of the agreement in force between the purchaser of the Motorola Product and Motorola, Inc., unless a separate Commercial Third Party Software License is included, in which case, your use of the Commercial Third Party Software will then be governed by the separate Commercial Third Party License. The Publicly Available Software that may be included on this media, or in the Motorola Product, is listed below. The use of the listed Publicly Available Software is subject to the licenses, terms and conditions of the agreement in force between the purchaser of the Motorola Product and Motorola, Inc., as well as, the terms and conditions of the license of each Publicly Available Software package. Copies of the licenses for the listed Publicly Available Software, as well as, all attributions, acknowledgements, and software information details, are included below. Motorola is required to reproduce the software licenses, acknowledgments and copyright notices as provided by the Authors and Owners, thus, all such information is provided in its native language form, without modification or translation. The Publicly Available Software in the list below is limited to the Publicly Available Software included by Motorola. The Publicly Available Software included by Commercial Third Party Software or Products, that is used in the Motorola Product, are disclosed in the Commercial Third Party Licenses, or via the respective Commercial Third Party Publicly Available Software Legal Notices. Publicly available software list:
Name:
Version:
Description:
Software Site:
Source Code:
License:
Regular Expression Evaluator 8.3 Compiles and executes regular expressions http://www.freebsd.org/cgi/cvsweb.cgi/src/lib/libc/regex/
No Source Distribution Obligations. Motorola will not provide nor distribute the Source Code for the Regular Expression Evaluator. BSD Style License 1992 Henry Spencer. 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Henry Spencer of the University of Toronto. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:
iii This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors. 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Motorola, Inc. One Motorola Plaza Holtsville, New York 11742-1300 http://www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility Patents This product is covered by one or more of the patents listed on the website:
http://www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility/patents. Warranty The complete Motorola hardware product warranty statement is available at:
http://www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility/warranty. Revision History Changes to the original manual are listed below:
Change Date Description
-01 Rev A 3/2010 Initial release. iv Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table of Contents Patents........................................................................................................................... iii Warranty ........................................................................................................................ iii Revision History............................................................................................................. iii About This Guide Introduction .................................................................................................................... xvii Configurations................................................................................................................ xvii Chapter Descriptions ..................................................................................................... xvii Notational Conventions.................................................................................................. xviii Related Documents ....................................................................................................... xix Service Information........................................................................................................ xix Chapter 1: Getting Started Introduction ................................................................................................................... 1-1 Interfaces ...................................................................................................................... 1-2 Unpacking the Digital Scanner and Cradle ................................................................... 1-2 Parts ............................................................................................................................. 1-3 Scanner ................................................................................................................... 1-3 Cradle ..................................................................................................................... 1-4 Digital Scanner Cradle .................................................................................................. 1-6 Connecting the Cradle ............................................................................................ 1-6 Supplying Power to the Cradle ............................................................................... 1-7 Using the USB Interface to Supply Power ........................................................ 1-7 Lost Connection to Host .......................................................................................... 1-7 Mounting the Cradle ................................................................................................ 1-7 Replacing the Digital Scanner Battery .......................................................................... 1-8 Charging the Digital Scanner Battery ........................................................................... 1-9 Charging LED ......................................................................................................... 1-9 Shutting Off the Digital Scanner Battery ....................................................................... 1-9 Reconditioning the Digital Scanner Battery .................................................................. 1-9 Battery Reconditioning LED Definitions .................................................................. 1-10 Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle ................................................................... 1-10 vi Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Horizontal Cradle Mount ......................................................................................... 1-10 Vertical Cradle Mount ............................................................................................. 1-10 Radio Communications ................................................................................................. 1-11 Configuring the Digital Scanner .................................................................................... 1-11 Accessories .................................................................................................................. 1-12 Lanyard ................................................................................................................... 1-12 Chapter 2: Scanning Introduction ................................................................................................................... 2-1 Beeper Definitions ........................................................................................................ 2-1 LED Definitions ............................................................................................................. 2-3 Scanning ...................................................................................................................... 2-5 Aiming ..................................................................................................................... 2-5 Decode Ranges ............................................................................................................ 2-7 Chapter 3: Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications Introduction ................................................................................................................... 3-1 Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 3-1 Digital Scanner ........................................................................................................ 3-1 Cradle ..................................................................................................................... 3-2 Battery Information ....................................................................................................... 3-2 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 3-2 Technical Specifications ............................................................................................... 3-7 Cradle Signal Descriptions ........................................................................................... 3-10 Chapter 4: Radio Communications Introduction ................................................................................................................... 4-1 Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................... 4-1 Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................ 4-1 Radio Communications Parameter Defaults ................................................................. 4-2 Wireless Beeper Definitions .......................................................................................... 4-3 Radio Communications Host Types ............................................................................. 4-4 Bluetooth Technology Profile Support .......................................................................... 4-6 Master/Slave Set Up ............................................................................................... 4-6 Master ............................................................................................................... 4-6 Slave ................................................................................................................. 4-6 Bluetooth Friendly Name ........................................................................................ 4-7 Discoverable Mode ................................................................................................. 4-7 HID Host Parameters .................................................................................................... 4-8 HID Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) ...................................................... 4-8 HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay .............................................................................. 4-10 HID CAPS Lock Override ........................................................................................ 4-10 HID Ignore Unknown Characters ............................................................................ 4-11 Emulate Keypad ...................................................................................................... 4-11 HID Keyboard FN1 Substitution .............................................................................. 4-12 HID Function Key Mapping ..................................................................................... 4-12 Simulated Caps Lock .............................................................................................. 4-13 Table of Contents vii Convert Case .......................................................................................................... 4-13 Auto-reconnect Feature ................................................................................................ 4-14 Reconnect Attempt Beep Feedback ....................................................................... 4-14 Reconnect Attempt Interval ..................................................................................... 4-15 Auto-reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation (HID Slave) Mode ..................... 4-17 Out of Range Indicator .................................................................................................. 4-17 Digital Scanner(s) To Cradle Support ........................................................................... 4-18 Modes of Operation ................................................................................................ 4-18 Point-to-Point Communication .......................................................................... 4-18 Multipoint-to-Point Communication ................................................................... 4-18 Parameter Broadcast (Cradle Host Only) ............................................................... 4-19 Pairing ..................................................................................................................... 4-19 Pairing Modes ................................................................................................... 4-20 Lock Override .................................................................................................... 4-20 Pairing Methods ................................................................................................ 4-21 Unpairing ........................................................................................................... 4-21 Pairing Bar Code Format ........................................................................................ 4-22 Pairing Bar Code Example ................................................................................ 4-22 Connection Maintenance Interval ........................................................................... 4-23 Considerations .................................................................................................. 4-23 Bluetooth Security ......................................................................................................... 4-25 Authentication ......................................................................................................... 4-25 PIN Code ................................................................................................................ 4-26 Variable PIN Code ............................................................................................ 4-26 Encryption ............................................................................................................... 4-27 Chapter 5: User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options Introduction ................................................................................................................... 5-1 Scanning Sequence Examples ..................................................................................... 5-2 Errors While Scanning .................................................................................................. 5-2 User Preferences/Miscellaneous Option Parameter Defaults ...................................... 5-2 User Preferences .......................................................................................................... 5-4 Default Parameters ................................................................................................. 5-4 Parameter Bar Code Scanning ............................................................................... 5-5 Beep After Good Decode ........................................................................................ 5-5 Suppress Power Up Beeps ..................................................................................... 5-6 Beeper Tone ........................................................................................................... 5-7 Beeper Volume ....................................................................................................... 5-8 Beeper Duration ...................................................................................................... 5-9 Beep on Insertion .................................................................................................... 5-9 Batch Mode ............................................................................................................. 5-10 Modes of Operation .......................................................................................... 5-10 Low Power Mode .................................................................................................... 5-12 Time Delay to Reduced Power Mode ..................................................................... 5-13 Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Aim .......................................................... 5-14 Hand-Held Trigger Mode ........................................................................................ 5-15 Picklist Mode ........................................................................................................... 5-16 Mobile Phone/Display Mode ................................................................................... 5-17 Continuous Bar Code Read .................................................................................... 5-18 viii Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Unique Bar Code Reporting .................................................................................... 5-18 Decode Session Timeout ........................................................................................ 5-19 Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol ............................................................ 5-20 Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols ...................................................... 5-20 Fuzzy 1D Processing .............................................................................................. 5-21 Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern ......................................................................... 5-22 Decoding Illumination .............................................................................................. 5-23 Multicode Mode ....................................................................................................... 5-23 Multicode Expression .............................................................................................. 5-24 Multicode Expression Syntax ............................................................................ 5-24 Defining Multicode Expression Notes ............................................................... 5-25 Multicode Mode Concatenation .............................................................................. 5-29 Multicode Concatenation Symbology ...................................................................... 5-30 Multicode Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 5-31 Troubleshooting Multicode Expression Programming ...................................... 5-31 Troubleshooting Multicode Mode Scanning and Decoding ............................... 5-31 Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters ............................................................................. 5-33 Transmit Code ID Character ................................................................................... 5-33 Prefix/Suffix Values ................................................................................................. 5-34 Scan Data Transmission Format ............................................................................ 5-35 FN1 Substitution Values ......................................................................................... 5-36 Transmit No Read Message ................................................................................. 5-37 Chapter 6: USB Interface Introduction ................................................................................................................... 6-1 Connecting a USB Interface ......................................................................................... 6-2 USB Parameter Defaults .............................................................................................. 6-3 USB Host Parameters .................................................................................................. 6-4 USB Device Type .................................................................................................... 6-4 USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) .................................................... 6-5 USB Keystroke Delay ............................................................................................. 6-7 USB CAPS Lock Override ...................................................................................... 6-7 USB Ignore Unknown Characters ........................................................................... 6-8 Emulate Keypad ...................................................................................................... 6-8 USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution ............................................................................ 6-9 Function Key Mapping ............................................................................................ 6-9 Simulated Caps Lock .............................................................................................. 6-10 Convert Case .......................................................................................................... 6-10 Optional USB Parameters ............................................................................................ 6-11 Ignore Beep ............................................................................................................ 6-11 Ignore Bar Code Configuration ............................................................................... 6-11 ASCII Character Set for USB ........................................................................................ 6-12 Chapter 7: RS-232 Interface Introduction ................................................................................................................... 7-1 Connecting an RS-232 Interface .................................................................................. 7-2 RS-232 Parameter Defaults .......................................................................................... 7-3 RS-232 Host Parameters .............................................................................................. 7-4 Table of Contents ix RS-232 Host Types ................................................................................................. 7-6 Baud Rate ............................................................................................................... 7-8 Parity ....................................................................................................................... 7-9 Stop Bit Select ........................................................................................................ 7-9 Data Bits (ASCII Format) ........................................................................................ 7-10 Check Receive Errors ............................................................................................. 7-11 Hardware Handshaking .......................................................................................... 7-11 Software Handshaking ............................................................................................ 7-13 Host Serial Response Time-out .............................................................................. 7-15 RTS Line State ........................................................................................................ 7-16 Beep on <BEL> ....................................................................................................... 7-16 Intercharacter Delay ................................................................................................ 7-17 Nixdorf Beep/LED Options ...................................................................................... 7-18 Ignore Unknown Characters ................................................................................... 7-18 ASCII Character Set for RS-232 ................................................................................... 7-19 Chapter 8: Keyboard Wedge Interface Introduction ................................................................................................................... 8-1 Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface ..................................................................... 8-2 Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults .......................................................................... 8-3 Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters .............................................................................. 8-4 Keyboard Wedge Host Types ................................................................................. 8-4 Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes) ................................................ 8-5 Ignore Unknown Characters ................................................................................... 8-6 Keystroke Delay ...................................................................................................... 8-7 Intra-Keystroke Delay ............................................................................................. 8-7 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation ..................................................................... 8-8 Caps Lock On ......................................................................................................... 8-8 Caps Lock Override ................................................................................................ 8-9 Convert Wedge Data .............................................................................................. 8-9 Function Key Mapping ............................................................................................ 8-10 FN1 Substitution ..................................................................................................... 8-10 Send Make and Break ............................................................................................ 8-11 Keyboard Maps ............................................................................................................. 8-12 ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge ................................................................... 8-13 Chapter 9: IBM Interface Introduction ................................................................................................................... 9-1 Connecting to an IBM 468X/469X Host ........................................................................ 9-2 IBM Parameter Defaults ............................................................................................... 9-3 IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters ................................................................................. 9-4 Port Address ........................................................................................................... 9-4 Convert Unknown to Code 39 ................................................................................. 9-5 Optional IBM Parameters ............................................................................................. 9-5 Ignore Beep ............................................................................................................ 9-5 Ignore Bar Code Configuration ............................................................................... 9-6 x Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter 10: Wand Emulation Interface Introduction ................................................................................................................... 10-1 Connecting Using Wand Emulation .............................................................................. 10-2 Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults ........................................................................... 10-3 Wand Emulation Host Parameters ............................................................................... 10-4 Wand Emulation Host Types .................................................................................. 10-4 Leading Margin (Quiet Zone) .................................................................................. 10-5 Polarity .................................................................................................................... 10-6 Ignore Unknown Characters ................................................................................... 10-6 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 .......................................................................... 10-7 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII ............................................................................... 10-8 Chapter 11: Scanner Emulation Interface Connecting Using Scanner Emulation .......................................................................... 11-2 Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults ....................................................................... 11-3 Scanner Emulation Host ............................................................................................... 11-3 Scanner Emulation Host Parameters ........................................................................... 11-4 Beep Style ............................................................................................................... 11-4 Parameter Pass-Through ........................................................................................ 11-5 Convert Newer Code Types .................................................................................... 11-6 Module Width .......................................................................................................... 11-6 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 .......................................................................... 11-7 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion .............................................................................. 11-7 Transmission Timeout ............................................................................................. 11-8 Ignore Unknown Characters ................................................................................... 11-9 Leading Margin ....................................................................................................... 11-9 Check For Decode LED .......................................................................................... 11-10 Chapter 12: 123Scan2 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 12-1 Communication with 123Scan2 .................................................................................... 12-1 123Scan2 Requirements .............................................................................................. 12-1 Chapter 13: OCR Programming Introduction ................................................................................................................... 13-1 OCR Parameter Defaults .............................................................................................. 13-2 OCR Programming Parameters .................................................................................... 13-3 Enable/Disable OCR-A ........................................................................................... 13-3 OCR-A Variant ........................................................................................................ 13-3 Enable/Disable OCR-B ........................................................................................... 13-5 OCR-B Variant ........................................................................................................ 13-6 Enable/Disable MICR E13B .................................................................................... 13-9 Enable/Disable US Currency Serial Number .......................................................... 13-10 OCR Orientation ..................................................................................................... 13-10 OCR Lines .............................................................................................................. 13-12 OCR Minimum Characters ...................................................................................... 13-12 OCR Maximum Characters ..................................................................................... 13-13 Table of Contents xi OCR Security Level ................................................................................................ 13-13 OCR Subset ............................................................................................................ 13-14 OCR Quiet Zone ..................................................................................................... 13-14 OCR Bright Illumination .......................................................................................... 13-15 OCR Template ........................................................................................................ 13-16 Required Digit (9) ............................................................................................. 13-16 Required Alpha (A) .......................................................................................... 13-16 Optional Alphanumeric (1) ............................................................................... 13-17 Optional Alpha (2) ............................................................................................ 13-17 Alpha or Digit (3) .............................................................................................. 13-17 Any Including Space & Reject (4) .................................................................... 13-18 Any except Space & Reject (5) ........................................................................ 13-18 Optional Digit (7) .............................................................................................. 13-18 Digit or Fill (8) ................................................................................................... 13-19 Alpha or Fill (F) ................................................................................................ 13-19 Required Space ( ) ........................................................................................... 13-19 Optional Small Special (.) ................................................................................ 13-20 Other Template Operators ................................................................................ 13-20 Repeat Previous (R) ......................................................................................... 13-24 Template Examples .......................................................................................... 13-25 OCR Check Digit Modulus ...................................................................................... 13-25 OCR Check Digit Multiplier ..................................................................................... 13-26 OCR Check Digit Validation .................................................................................... 13-27 None ................................................................................................................. 13-27 Product Add Left to Right .................................................................................. 13-27 Product Add Right to Left .................................................................................. 13-28 Digit Add Left to Right ....................................................................................... 13-28 Digit Add Right to Left ....................................................................................... 13-29 Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder ................................................... 13-30 Digit Add Right To Left Simple Remainder ....................................................... 13-31 Health Industry - HIBCC43 ............................................................................... 13-31 Chapter 14: Symbologies Introduction ................................................................................................................... 14-1 Scanning Sequence Examples ..................................................................................... 14-1 Errors While Scanning .................................................................................................. 14-2 Symbology Parameter Defaults .................................................................................... 14-2 UPC/EAN ...................................................................................................................... 14-7 Enable/Disable UPC-A ............................................................................................ 14-7 Enable/Disable UPC-E ............................................................................................ 14-7 Enable/Disable UPC-E1 .......................................................................................... 14-8 Enable/Disable EAN-8/JAN-8 ................................................................................. 14-8 Enable/Disable EAN-13/JAN-13 ............................................................................. 14-9 Enable/Disable Bookland EAN ............................................................................... 14-9 Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals .................................................................. 14-10 User-Programmable Supplementals ....................................................................... 14-13 UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy ............................................................ 14-13 UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format ......................................................... 14-14 Transmit UPC-A Check Digit .................................................................................. 14-14 xii Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Transmit UPC-E Check Digit .................................................................................. 14-15 Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit ................................................................................ 14-15 UPC-A Preamble .................................................................................................... 14-16 UPC-E Preamble .................................................................................................... 14-17 UPC-E1 Preamble .................................................................................................. 14-18 Convert UPC-E to UPC-A ....................................................................................... 14-19 Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A ..................................................................................... 14-19 EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend .............................................................................................. 14-20 Bookland ISBN Format ........................................................................................... 14-21 UCC Coupon Extended Code ................................................................................. 14-22 ISSN EAN ............................................................................................................... 14-22 Code 128 ...................................................................................................................... 14-23 Enable/Disable Code 128 ....................................................................................... 14-23 Set Lengths for Code 128 ....................................................................................... 14-23 Enable/Disable GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) ................................................ 14-24 Enable/Disable ISBT 128 ........................................................................................ 14-25 ISBT Concatenation ................................................................................................ 14-26 Check ISBT Table ................................................................................................... 14-27 ISBT Concatenation Redundancy ........................................................................... 14-27 Code 39 ........................................................................................................................ 14-28 Enable/Disable Code 39 ......................................................................................... 14-28 Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39 ............................................................................ 14-28 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 .................................................................................. 14-29 Code 32 Prefix ........................................................................................................ 14-29 Set Lengths for Code 39 ......................................................................................... 14-30 Code 39 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................ 14-31 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit ................................................................................ 14-31 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion .............................................................................. 14-32 Code 39 Buffering - Scan & Store ........................................................................... 14-32 Buffer Data ........................................................................................................ 14-33 Clear Transmission Buffer ................................................................................ 14-33 Transmit Buffer ................................................................................................. 14-34 Overfilling Transmission Buffer ......................................................................... 14-34 Attempt to Transmit an Empty Buffer ................................................................ 14-34 Code 93 ........................................................................................................................ 14-35 Enable/Disable Code 93 ......................................................................................... 14-35 Set Lengths for Code 93 ......................................................................................... 14-35 Code 11 ........................................................................................................................ 14-37 Code 11 .................................................................................................................. 14-37 Set Lengths for Code 11 ......................................................................................... 14-37 Code 11 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................ 14-39 Transmit Code 11 Check Digits .............................................................................. 14-40 Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) ................................................................................................. 14-40 Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 ........................................................................... 14-40 Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 ........................................................................... 14-41 I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................... 14-43 Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit ................................................................................... 14-43 Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 ...................................................................................... 14-44 Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) .................................................................................................... 14-44 Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5 ................................................................................ 14-44 Table of Contents xiii Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 ............................................................................... 14-45 Codabar (NW - 7) ......................................................................................................... 14-47 Enable/Disable Codabar ......................................................................................... 14-47 Set Lengths for Codabar ......................................................................................... 14-47 CLSI Editing ............................................................................................................ 14-49 NOTIS Editing ......................................................................................................... 14-49 MSI ............................................................................................................................... 14-50 Enable/Disable MSI ................................................................................................ 14-50 Set Lengths for MSI ................................................................................................ 14-50 MSI Check Digits .................................................................................................... 14-52 Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) ................................................................................... 14-52 MSI Check Digit Algorithm ...................................................................................... 14-53 Chinese 2 of 5 ............................................................................................................... 14-53 Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5 ................................................................................ 14-53 Matrix 2 of 5 .................................................................................................................. 14-54 Enable/Disable Matrix 2 of 5 ................................................................................... 14-54 Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 ................................................................................... 14-55 Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy ....................................................................................... 14-56 Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit ......................................................................................... 14-56 Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit .......................................................................... 14-57 Korean 3 of 5 ................................................................................................................ 14-57 Enable/Disable Korean 3 of 5 ................................................................................. 14-57 Inverse 1D .................................................................................................................... 14-58 Postal Codes ................................................................................................................ 14-59 US Postnet .............................................................................................................. 14-59 US Planet ................................................................................................................ 14-59 Transmit US Postal Check Digit .............................................................................. 14-60 UK Postal ................................................................................................................ 14-60 Transmit UK Postal Check Digit .............................................................................. 14-61 Japan Postal ........................................................................................................... 14-61 Australian Postal ..................................................................................................... 14-62 Netherlands KIX Code ........................................................................................... 14-62 USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail ..................................................................... 14-63 UPU FICS Postal .................................................................................................... 14-63 GS1 DataBar ................................................................................................................ 14-64 GS1 DataBar-14 ..................................................................................................... 14-64 GS1 DataBar Limited .............................................................................................. 14-64 GS1 DataBar Expanded ......................................................................................... 14-65 Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN ........................................................................ 14-65 Composite ..................................................................................................................... 14-66 Composite CC-C ..................................................................................................... 14-66 Composite CC-A/B .................................................................................................. 14-66 Composite TLC-39 .................................................................................................. 14-67 UPC Composite Mode ............................................................................................ 14-67 Composite Beep Mode ........................................................................................... 14-68 GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes ................................... 14-68 2D Symbologies ............................................................................................................ 14-69 Enable/Disable PDF417 .......................................................................................... 14-69 Enable/Disable MicroPDF417 ................................................................................. 14-69 Code 128 Emulation ............................................................................................... 14-70 xiv Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Data Matrix .............................................................................................................. 14-71 Data Matrix Inverse ................................................................................................. 14-71 Maxicode ................................................................................................................. 14-72 QR Code ................................................................................................................. 14-72 QR Inverse .............................................................................................................. 14-73 MicroQR .................................................................................................................. 14-73 Aztec ....................................................................................................................... 14-74 Aztec Inverse .......................................................................................................... 14-74 Redundancy Level ........................................................................................................ 14-75 Redundancy Level 1 ............................................................................................... 14-75 Redundancy Level 2 ............................................................................................... 14-75 Redundancy Level 3 ............................................................................................... 14-75 Redundancy Level 4 ............................................................................................... 14-76 Security Level ............................................................................................................... 14-77 Intercharacter Gap Size .......................................................................................... 14-78 Report Version .............................................................................................................. 14-78 Macro PDF Features .................................................................................................... 14-79 Flush Macro Buffer .................................................................................................. 14-79 Abort Macro PDF Entry ........................................................................................... 14-79 Chapter 15: Advanced Data Formatting Introduction ................................................................................................................... 15-1 Rules: Criteria Linked to Actions ................................................................................... 15-1 Using ADF Bar Codes .................................................................................................. 15-2 ADF Bar Code Menu Example ..................................................................................... 15-2 Rule 1: The Code 128 Scanning Rule .................................................................... 15-3 Rule 2: The UPC Scanning Rule ............................................................................ 15-3 Alternate Rule Sets ................................................................................................. 15-3 Rules Hierarchy (in Bar Codes) .............................................................................. 15-4 Default Rules .......................................................................................................... 15-5 ADF Bar Codes ............................................................................................................. 15-6 Special Commands ....................................................................................................... 15-8 Pause Duration ....................................................................................................... 15-8 Begin New Rule ...................................................................................................... 15-8 Save Rule ............................................................................................................... 15-8 Erase ....................................................................................................................... 15-9 Quit Entering Rules ................................................................................................. 15-9 Disable Rule Set ..................................................................................................... 15-10 Criteria .......................................................................................................................... 15-11 Code Types ............................................................................................................. 15-11 Code Lengths .......................................................................................................... 15-15 Message Containing A Specific Data String ........................................................... 15-19 Specific String at Start ...................................................................................... 15-19 Specific String, Any Location ............................................................................ 15-20 Any Message OK .............................................................................................. 15-20 Numeric Keypad ............................................................................................... 15-21 Rule Belongs To Set ......................................................................................... 15-23 Actions .......................................................................................................................... 15-24 Send Data ............................................................................................................... 15-24 Table of Contents xv Setup Field(s) .......................................................................................................... 15-27 Move Cursor ..................................................................................................... 15-28 Send Pause ...................................................................................................... 15-28 Skip Ahead ........................................................................................................ 15-29 Skip Back ......................................................................................................... 15-30 Send Preset Value ............................................................................................ 15-32 Modify Data ............................................................................................................. 15-32 Remove All Spaces ........................................................................................... 15-32 Crunch All Spaces ............................................................................................ 15-32 Stop Space Removal ........................................................................................ 15-32 Remove Leading Zeros ..................................................................................... 15-33 Stop Zero Removal ........................................................................................... 15-33 Pad Data with Spaces ............................................................................................. 15-34 Pad Data with Zeros ............................................................................................... 15-38 Beeps ...................................................................................................................... 15-43 Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) ........................... 15-43 Control Characters ............................................................................................ 15-43 Keyboard Characters ........................................................................................ 15-48 Send ALT Characters ....................................................................................... 15-61 Send Keypad Characters .................................................................................. 15-67 Send Function Key ............................................................................................ 15-72 Send Right Control Key .......................................................................................... 15-79 Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters ...................................................... 15-80 Turn On/Off Rule Sets ............................................................................................ 15-85 Alphanumeric Keyboard ............................................................................................... 15-87 Chapter 16: Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) Introduction ................................................................................................................... 16-1 Drivers License Parsing ............................................................................................... 16-2 Parsing Drivers License Data Fields (Embedded Driver's License Parsing) ............... 16-3 Embedded Driver's License Parsing Criteria - Code Type ..................................... 16-3 Drivers License Parse Field Bar Codes ................................................................. 16-4 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes .............................................................................. 16-7 Parsing Rule Example .................................................................................................. 16-17 Embedded Driver's License Parsing ADF Example ................................................ 16-21 Field Update Procedure ................................................................................................ 16-23 User Preferences .......................................................................................................... 16-24 Set Default Parameter ............................................................................................ 16-24 Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) ........................... 16-24 Control Characters ............................................................................................ 16-24 Keyboard Characters ........................................................................................ 16-29 Appendix A: Standard Default Parameters Appendix B: Programming Reference Symbol Code Identifiers ................................................................................................ B-1 AIM Code Identifiers ..................................................................................................... B-3 xvi Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Appendix C: Sample Bar Codes Code 39 ........................................................................................................................ C-1 UPC/EAN ...................................................................................................................... C-1 UPC-A, 100% .......................................................................................................... C-1 EAN-13, 100% ........................................................................................................ C-2 Code 128 ...................................................................................................................... C-2 Interleaved 2 of 5 .......................................................................................................... C-2 GS1 DataBar ................................................................................................................ C-3 GS1 DataBar-14 ..................................................................................................... C-4 PDF417 ......................................................................................................................... C-4 Data Matrix ................................................................................................................... C-4 Maxicode ...................................................................................................................... C-5 QR Code ....................................................................................................................... C-5 US Postnet .................................................................................................................... C-5 UK Postal ...................................................................................................................... C-5 Appendix D: Numeric Bar Codes Numeric Bar Codes ...................................................................................................... D-2 Cancel ........................................................................................................................... D-3 Appendix E: Alphanumeric Bar Codes Alphanumeric Keyboard ............................................................................................... E-1 Appendix F: ASCII Character Sets Glossary Index Tell Us What You Think... About This Guide Introduction The Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide provides general instructions for setting up, operating, maintaining, and troubleshooting the Symbol DS6878 digital scanner and cradles. Configurations This guide includes the following configurations:
DS6878-SR20001WR - DS6878 digital scanner, standard range, cash register white
DS6878-SR20007WR - DS6878 digital scanner, standard range, twilight black
DS6878-HC2000BWR - DS6878 digital scanner, standard range, healthcare white
DS6878-DL20001WR - DS6878 digital scanner, standard range, DL parsing, cash register white
DS6878-DL20007WR - DS6878 digital scanner, standard range, DL parsing, twilight black
DS6878-HD20007WR - DS6878 digital scanner, high density, twilight black Chapter Descriptions Topics covered in this guide are as follows:
Chapter 1, Getting Started provides a product overview, unpacking instructions, and cable connection information.
Chapter 2, Scanning describes parts of the digital scanner, beeper and LED definitions, and how to use the digital scanner.
Chapter 3, Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications provides information on how to care for the digital scanner and cradle, troubleshooting, and technical specifications.
Chapter 4, Radio Communications provides information about the modes of operation and features available for wireless communication. This chapter also includes programming bar codes to configure the digital scanner. xviii Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide
Chapter 5, User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options provides programming bar codes for selecting user preference features for the digital scanner and commonly used bar codes to customize how the data is transmitted to the host device.
Chapter 6, USB Interface provides information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle for USB operation.
Chapter 7, RS-232 Interface provides information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle for RS-232 operation.
Chapter 8, Keyboard Wedge Interface provides information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle for Keyboard Wedge operation.
Chapter 9, IBM Interface provides all information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle with IBM 468X/469X POS systems.
Chapter 10, Wand Emulation Interface provides all information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle for Wand Emulation operation.
Chapter 11, Scanner Emulation Interface provides information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle for Scanner Emulation operation.
Chapter 12, 123Scan2 (PC based scanner configuration tool) enables rapid and easy customized setup of Symbol scanners by Motorola.
Chapter 13, OCR Programming describes how to set up the digital scanner for OCR programming.
Chapter 14, Symbologies describes all symbology features and provides the programming bar codes necessary for selecting these features for the digital scanner.
Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) describes how to customize scanned data before transmitting to the host. This chapter also contains the bar codes for advanced data formatting.
Chapter 16, Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) describes how the DS6878-DL digital scanner can parse out information from the standard US drivers licenses and certain other American Association of Motor Vehicle Administrators (AAMVA) compliant ID cards.
Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters provides a table of all host devices and miscellaneous digital scanner defaults.
Appendix B, Programming Reference provides a table of AIM code identifiers, ASCII character conversions, and keyboard maps.
Appendix C, Sample Bar Codes includes sample bar codes.
Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes includes the numeric bar codes to scan for parameters requiring specific numeric values.
Appendix E, Alphanumeric Bar Codes includes the bar codes representing the alphanumeric keyboard, used when setting ADF rules.
Appendix F, ASCII Character Sets provides ASCII character value tables. Notational Conventions The following conventions are used in this document:
Italics are used to highlight chapters and sections in this and related documents.
Bold text is used to highlight parameter names and options.
About This Guide xix bullets () indicate:
Action items Lists of alternatives Lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential
Sequential lists (e.g., those that describe step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered lists. Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) are used to denote default parameter settings.
* Indicates Default
*Baud Rate 9600 Feature/Option NOTE This symbol indicates something of special interest or importance to the reader. Failure to read the note will not result in physical harm to the reader, equipment or data. CAUTION This symbol indicates that if this information is ignored, the possibility of data or material damage may occur. WARNING! This symbol indicates that if this information is ignored the possibility that serious personal injury may occur. Related Documents The Symbol DS6878 Quick Start Guide (p/n 72-131700-xx) provides general information to help the user get started with the digital scanner. It includes basic operation instructions and start up bar codes. The STB4278/STB4208 Cradle Quick Reference Guide (p/n 72-71010-xx) provides information to help the user set up and use the charge only and host interface cradles. It includes set up and mounting instructions. The latest version of this guide and all guides, are available at:
http://www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility/manuals Service Information If you have a problem with your equipment, contact Motorola Enterprise Mobility Support for your region. Contact information is available at: http://www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility/support When contacting Enterprise Mobility Support, please have the following information available:
Serial number of the unit
Model number or product name
xx Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide
Software type and version number. Motorola responds to calls by E-mail, telephone or fax within the time limits set forth in support agreements. If your problem cannot be solved by Motorola Enterprise Mobility Support, you may need to return your equipment for servicing and will be given specific directions. Motorola is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is not used. Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty. If you purchased your Enterprise Mobility business product from a Motorola business partner, contact that business partner for support. Chapter 1 Getting Started Introduction The Symbol DS6878 combines superior 1D and 2D omnidirectional bar code scanning performance and advanced ergonomics in a light-weight design. The digital scanner ensures comfort and ease of use for extended periods of time. Figure 1-1 Symbol DS6878 Digital Scanner 1 - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Interfaces The STB4278 model cradle (p/n: CR0078-SC) supports the following interfaces:
USB connection to a host. The cradle auto detects a USB host and defaults to the HID keyboard interface type. Select other USB interface types by scanning programming bar code menus.This interface supports the following international keyboards (for Windows environment): North America, German, French, French Canadian, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, UK English, Portuguese-Brazilian, and Japanese.
Standard RS-232 connection to a host. Scan bar code menus to set up proper communication of the cradle with the host.
Keyboard Wedge connection to a host. The host interprets scanned data as keystrokes. This interface supports the following international keyboards (for Windows environment): North America, German, French, French Canadian, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, UK English, Portuguese-Brazilian, and Japanese.
Connection to IBM 468X/469X hosts. Scan bar code menus to set up communication of the cradle with the IBM terminal.
Wand Emulation connection to a host. The cradle is connected to a portable data terminal, a controller, or host which collects the data as wand data and decodes it.
Scanner Emulation connection to a host. The cradle is connected to a portable data terminal, a controller which collects the data and interprets it for the host.
Synapse capability which allows connection to a wide variety of host systems using a Synapse and Synapse adapter cable. The cradle auto detects the host.
Configuration via 123Scan2. Unpacking the Digital Scanner and Cradle Remove the digital scanner and cradle from their respective packing and inspect for damage. If the digital scanner or cradle was damaged in transit, contact Motorola Enterprise Mobility Support. See page xix for contact information. KEEP THE PACKING. It is the approved shipping container and should be used if the equipment ever needs to be returned for servicing. Getting Started 1 - 3 Battery Door Latch Metal Charging Contacts Parts Scanner Scan Window Trigger LED Beeper Figure 1-2 Parts of the Digital Scanner 1 - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Cradle Pairing Bar Code Convertible Mount Hook Charging LED Latch Latch Charging/
Communications Contacts Figure 1-3 Cradle Front View Getting Started 1 - 5 Mounting Hole Rubber Foot Power Cable Hook Power Port Host Cable Groove Rubber Foot Figure 1-4 Cradle Back View Rubber Foot Host Cable Hook Host Port Power Cable Groove Desk/Wall Mount Converter Knob Rubber Foot Mounting Hole 1 - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Digital Scanner Cradle The digital scanner cradle serves as a stand, charger, and host interface for the digital scanner. The cradle sits on a desktop or mounts on a vertical surface (such as a wall). For more information about mounting options and procedures, refer to the documentation included with the cradle. There are two versions of the cradle:
Charging cradle with radio: When the cordless digital scanner is paired to the cradle, all communication between the digital scanner and the host computer is accomplished through the cradle. Each bar code contains programming instructions or other data unique to the bar code pattern. The digital scanner is paired to the cradle and transmits bar code data to the cradle via Bluetooth Technology Profile Support. The cradle then sends that information via an interface cable to the host computer for interpretation.
Charge-only cradle: This cradle serves as a stand and battery charger. It does not contain a radio and has no communication capability. NOTE For more information about communication between the digital scanner, cradle and host, see Chapter 4, Radio Communications. Connecting the Cradle Important: Connect the interface cable and power supply (if necessary) in the following order to ensure proper operation of the digital scanner and cradle:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. If a power supply is connected to the cradle, disconnect it. See Figure 1-5. If using an interface cable, insert the cable into the cradles host port. If using a power supply that connects to the interface cable, insert this power supply into the power connector on the interface cable, and the other end to an AC supply. Insert the other end of the interface cable into the appropriate port on the host computer (see the specific host chapter for information on host connections). If using an external power supply (if required by the interface, or to allow fast charging of the digital scanner), insert the power cable into the power port on the back of the cradle, and connect the power supply to an approved AC supply (refer to the STB4278/STB4208 Cradle Quick Reference Guide for more information). Power Port Host Port Power Host Port Power Port Connect to appropriate host Figure 1-5 Connecting the Cables to the Cradle Getting Started 1 - 7 6. If applicable, thread the interface cable over the cable support hook and run the host and power cables into their respective cable grooves. 7. Mount the cradle, as necessary. (For information on mounting the cradle, refer to the documentation included with the cradle.) NOTE Disconnect the power supply before changing host cables, or the cradle may not recognize the new host. Different cables are required for different hosts. The connectors illustrated in each host chapter are examples only. The connectors may be different from those illustrated, but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same. Supplying Power to the Cradle The cradle receives power from one of two sources:
An external power supply.
When connected to the host through a host cable that supplies power. The cradle detects whether the host or the external supply is supplying power. It always draws power from the external supply when available, regardless of the presence of power from a host. Using the USB Interface to Supply Power When the cradle is connected to the host via the USB interface, it can be powered by the USB port instead of an external power supply. Powering from a USB host limits charging. The digital scanner charges at a slower rate than when charging from an external power supply. NOTE The radio link functions normally when the cradle draws power from a USB host. Lost Connection to Host If scanned data does not transmit to the cradles host, ensure that all cables are firmly inserted and the power supply is connected to an appropriate AC outlet. If scanned data still does not transmit to the host, reestablish a connection with the host:
1. Disconnect the power supply from the cradle. 2. Disconnect the host interface cable from the cradle. 3. Wait three seconds. 4. Reconnect the host interface cable to the cradle. 5. Reconnect the power supply to the cradle, if required. 6. Reestablish pairing with the cradle by scanning the pairing bar code. NOTE The STB4278 does not always require a power supply whereas the STB4208 always requires a power supply. Mounting the Cradle For information on mounting the cradle, refer to the documentation included with the cradle. 1 - 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Replacing the Digital Scanner Battery The battery is installed in the cordless digital scanner by the factory and resides in a chamber in the digital scanner handle. To replace the battery:
1. Insert a Phillips screwdriver in the screw at the base of the digital scanner, then turn the screw counterclockwise to release the latch. 2. Remove the latch. 3. If a battery is already installed, turn the digital scanner upright to slide the battery out. Disconnect the battery connector clip. 1 4 2 5 3 6 Battery Connector Clips Figure 1-6 Inserting the Battery 4. With the contacts on the connector clips facing in the same direction, attach the new batterys connector clip to the connector clip in the base of the digital scanner. 5. Slide the new battery into the battery well and ensure the battery leads are visible. The battery should sit securely in the well. 6. Attach and close the latch. 7. Insert a Phillips screwdriver in the screw at the base of the digital scanner, press down gently, and turn the screw clockwise to lock the latch in place. Getting Started 1 - 9 Charging the Digital Scanner Battery Fully charge the digital scanner battery before using the digital scanner for the first time. To charge the digital scanner battery, place the digital scanner in the cradle, ensuring that the metal contacts on the bottom of the digital scanner touch the contacts on the cradle. The battery begins charging when the digital scanner LED indicator starts flashing green. A complete charge of a fully discharged battery can take up to three hours using external power and up to five hours using non-external cable power. CAUTION To avoid a battery temperature fault, always charge the battery in the digital scanner within the recommended temperature of 32 to 104 F (0 to 40 C) nominal, 41 to 95 F (5 to 35 C) ideal. Charging LED When powered up, the cradle LED is always green. The digital scanner LED flashes a green during charging. See Table 2-2 on page 2-3 for all charging LED indications. Shutting Off the Digital Scanner Battery To shut off the NiMH battery for long term storage or shipping:
1. Scan Battery Off bar code below. 2. To turn the battery back on, place the digital scanner in the cradle. Battery Off Reconditioning the Digital Scanner Battery To maintain optimal performance of the digital scanner NiMH battery, perform a battery recondition approximately once a year. To begin the battery recondition cycle:
1. Scan Battery Recondition below. 2. Place the digital scanner into the cradle. Battery Recondition NOTE If the scanner is removed from the cradle during the battery reconditioning cycle, the scanner exits the battery reconditioning mode of operation and returns to the normal mode of battery charging (see Charging the Digital Scanner Battery on page 1-9). To restart the battery reconditioning cycle, re-scan the Battery Recondition parameter and place the scanner in the cradle. 1 - 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide 3. The digital scanner must perform two charge cycles to complete the battery reconditioning process
(discharge/charge/discharge/charge). See Table 1-1. Battery Reconditioning LED Definitions Table 1-1 Battery Reconditioning LED Definitions Battery Reconditioning Mode LED Discharging Charging Red Flash Green Flash Reconditioning Complete Green - Solid (always on) Comments Time to discharge is approximately 2.5 hours. Time to charge is approximately 2.5 hours with an external power supply. The digital scanner enters a trickle charge until the digital scanner is removed from the cradle. Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle Insert the digital scanner in the cradle so that the metal contacts on the bottom of the digital scanner handle touch the contacts on the cradle. Push the handle lightly to ensure a proper connection, engaging the contacts in the cradle and digital scanner. Ensure the desk/wall mount converter knob on the back of the cradle is in the correct position for the horizontal or vertical mounting. Horizontal Cradle Mount When mounting the cradle horizontally, where no fastening is necessary:
1. Ensure the rubber feet are attached to the cradle. These feet provide traction and prevent surface damage. 2. Ensure the desk/wall mount converter knob is in the position shown in Figure 1-7. Desk/Wall Mount Converter Knob Figure 1-7 Horizontal Mount - Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle Vertical Cradle Mount When mounting the cradle vertically:
1. Ensure the rubber feet are attached to the cradle. These feet provide traction and prevent surface damage. Getting Started 1 - 11 2. Ensure the convertible mount hook on the front of the cradle is inserted with the hook facing up. If not, remove and reverse the hook so that it is in position to secure the digital scanner in place. (See Figure 1-3 on page 1-4 for the location of the convertible mount hook.) 3. Ensure the desk/wall mount converter knob is in the position shown in Figure 1-8. Desk/Wall Mount Converter Knob Figure 1-8 Vertical Mount - Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle NOTE For your convenience, a wall mount bracket can be purchased from Motorola. For the appropriate measurements and instructions on mounting the cradle, refer to the STB4278/STB4208 Quick Reference Guide (p/n 72-71010-xx). Radio Communications The digital scanner can communicate with remote devices via Bluetooth Technology Profile Support, or by pairing with a cradle. For radio communication parameters, detailed information about operational modes, Bluetooth Technology Profile Support and pairing, see Chapter 4, Radio Communications. Configuring the Digital Scanner Use the bar codes in this manual or the 123Scan2 configuration program to configure the digital scanner. See Chapter 5, User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options for information about programming the digital scanner using bar code menus. Also see each host-specific chapter to set up connection to a specific host type. See Chapter 12, 123Scan2 to configure the digital scanner using this configuration program. 1 - 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Accessories The digital scanner and cradle accessories that are available separately include:
Power supplies for applications that do not supply power over the host cable. See each host interface chapter for set up information.
Wall-mount bracket for mounting the cradle vertically. Refer to the STB4278/STB4208 Cradle Quick Reference Guide (p/n 72-71010-xx) for a wall mounting template and installation instructions. Lanyard for wearing the digital scanner on a wrist. Lanyard The lanyard attaches to the inside of the digital scanner battery door latch. Figure 1-9 Attached Lanyard To attach the lanyard:
1. Open the battery door latch as described in Replacing the Digital Scanner Battery on page 1-8. Do not remove the battery.
Getting Started 1 - 13 2. Hook the loop of the lanyard around the screw container inside the battery door latch, between the loop guides. Loop Guides Screw Container Battery Door Latch Figure 1-10 Attaching Lanyard 3. Close the battery door latch. 4. Tighten the screw. 1 - 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter 2 Scanning Introduction This chapter provides beeper and LED definitions, scanning techniques, general instructions and tips about scanning, and decode ranges. Beeper Definitions The digital scanner issues different beep sequences and patterns to indicate status. Table 2-1 defines beep sequences that occur during both normal scanning and while programming the digital scanner. (For additional beeper definitions, see Wireless Beeper Definitions on page 4-3. Table 2-1 Standard Beeper Definitions Beeper Sequence Standard Use Low/medium/high beeps Power up. Indication High beep Four long low beeps A bar code symbol was decoded (if decode beeper is enabled). 1. A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol. The data is ignored. This occurs if a unit is not properly configured. Check option setting. 2. When communicating with a cradle, the cradle acknowledges receipt of data. If the acknowledgment is not received, this transmission error beep sequence sounds. Data may still have been received by the host. Check the host system for receipt of transmitted data. If data was not received by the host, re-scan the bar code. Four short beeps Five low long beeps Low battery warning. Conversion or format error. 2 - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 2-1 Standard Beeper Definitions (Continued) Beeper Sequence Indication Low beep Low/high/low/high beeps Low/high/low beeps High/high/high/low beeps Parameter Menu Scanning Long low/long high beeps Digital scanner detects power when inserted into a cradle. Note: This feature is enabled by default and can be disabled (see Beep on Insertion on page 5-9). Out of memory - unable to store a new bar code. ADF transmit error. RS-232 receive error. Input error, incorrect bar code or Cancel scanned, wrong entry, incorrect bar code programming sequence; remain in program mode. High/low beeps Keyboard parameter selected. Enter value using bar code keypad. High/low/high/low beeps Successful program exit with change in the parameter setting. Long low/long high/long low/long high beeps Out of host parameter storage space. Scan Default Parameters on page 5-4. Image Capture Low beep High/low beeps Wireless Operation High/low/high/low beeps Low/high beeps High/low beeps Snapshot mode started or completed. Snapshot mode timed out. Pairing bar code scanned. Bluetooth connection established. Bluetooth disconnection event. Note: When connected to a remote device using SPP or HID, if a disconnect beep sequence sounds immediately after a bar code is scanned, check the host device for receipt of transmitted data. It is possible that an attempt was made to transmit the last bar code scanned after the connection was lost. Long low/long high beeps Page timeout; remote device is out of range/not powered. Long low/long high/long low/long high beeps Connection attempt was rejected by remote device. Code 39 Buffering High/low beeps Three long high beeps High/low/high beeps Low/high/low beeps New Code 39 data was entered into the buffer. Code 39 buffer is full. The Code 39 buffer was erased. The Code 39 buffer was erased or there was an attempt to clear or transmit an empty buffer. Low/high beeps A successful transmission of buffered data. Scanning 2 - 3 Table 2-1 Standard Beeper Definitions (Continued) Beeper Sequence Indication Host Specific USB only Four high beeps Digital scanner has not completed initialization. Wait several seconds and scan again. Digital scanner gives a power-up beep after scanning a USB Device Type. Communication with the bus must be established before the digital scanner can operate at the highest power level. This power-up beep occurs more than once. The USB bus may put the digital scanner in a state where power to the digital scanner is cycled on and off more than once. This is normal and usually happens when the host PC cold boots. RS-232 only High beep LED Definitions A <BEL> character is received and Beep on <BEL> is enabled
(Point-to-Point mode only). In addition to beeper sequences, the digital scanner communicates with the user using a two-color LED display. Table 2-2 defines LED colors that display during scanning. Table 2-2 Standard Scanner LED Definitions LED Indication Scanning Green Flash Red Charging Green - Slow Continuous Flash1 A bar code was successfully decoded. Transmission error or digital scanner malfunction. Non-critical battery temperature fault. Battery is above or below normal operating temperature. If this occurs, do not use the digital scanner and move the digital scanner to a location within normal operating temperature. The digital scanner can remain in the cradle while the battery warms or cools to normal operating temperature. Note: For appropriate charging temperatures, see Table 3-3 on page 3-8. Green - Fast Continuous Flash2 1 A slow continuous flash is estimated at 1 flash per second. 2 A fast continuous flash is estimated at 2 flashes per second. Digital scanner is charging. 2 - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 2-2 Standard Scanner LED Definitions (Continued) LED Green - Solid Red Amber - Continuous Flash Indication Digital scanner is fully charged. Battery may require pre-charge. Critical battery temperature fault. Battery is above or below normal operating temperature. If this occurs, do not use the digital scanner and move the digital scanner to a location within normal operating temperature. The digital scanner can remain in the cradle while the battery warms or cools to normal operating temperature. Note: For appropriate charging temperatures, see Table 3-3 on page 3-8. 1 A slow continuous flash is estimated at 1 flash per second. 2 A fast continuous flash is estimated at 2 flashes per second. Table 2-3 Standard Cradle LED Definitions LED Green Green Flash Cradle is powered. Indication Cradle is externally powered with a USB host interface that suspended the cradle. The cradle is no longer connected to the digital scanner but it will charge the digital scanner. Scan the pairing bar code to pair the scanner and cradle (see Pairing on page 4-19). Red Flash 1 A slow continuous flash is estimated at 1 flash per second. 2 A fast continuous flash is estimated at 2 flashes per second. Transmission error. Scanning 2 - 5 Scanning To program the digital scanner, see the appropriate host chapter, Chapter 4, Radio Communications and Chapter 14, Symbologies. (In addition to the parameters included in the chapters mentioned, user preference and miscellaneous digital scanner option parameters are also available in this guide.) To scan:
1. Ensure all connections are secure (see appropriate host chapter). 2. Aim the digital scanner at the bar code. 3. Press the trigger. Figure 2-1 Scanning 4. Upon successful decode, the digital scanner beeps and the LED turns green. (For more information about beeper and LED definitions, see Table 2-1 and Table 2-2.) Aiming When scanning, the digital scanner projects a red laser aiming pattern which allows positioning the bar code within its field of view. See Decode Ranges on page 2-7 for the proper distance to achieve between the digital scanner and a bar code. Figure 2-2 Imager Aiming Pattern If necessary, the digital scanner turns on its red LEDs to illuminate the target bar code. 2 - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide To scan a bar code, center the symbol in any orientation within the aiming pattern. Be sure the entire symbol is within the rectangular area formed by the cross pattern. 1D bar code 2D bar code Symbol Aiming Pattern Figure 2-3 Scanning Orientation with Imager Aiming Pattern The digital scanner can also read a bar code presented within the aiming pattern but not centered. The top examples in Figure 2-4 show acceptable aiming options, while the bottom examples can not be decoded. 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 Figure 2-4 Acceptable and Incorrect Aiming Scanning 2 - 7 Decode Ranges Symbol Density Bar Code Type Typical Working Ranges Near Far 5 mil 13 mil 5 mil 6.6 mil 10 mil Code 39 100% UPC PDF PDF 0.7 1.2 2.0 1.2 6.6 14.2 4.5 6.0 Data Matrix 1.1 ???
7.2 ???
Figure 2-5 DS6878-SR / DS6878-HC / DS6878-DL Decode Ranges Symbol Density Bar Code Type Typical Working Ranges Near Far 3 mil 5 mil 13 mil 4 mil 5 mil 10 mil Code 39 Code 39 100% UPC PDF Data Matrix Data Matrix 0.6 FOV 1.2 0.9 0.9 ???
0.5 ???
3.4 4.9 6.8 2.8 3.5 ???
3.7 ???
Figure 2-6 DS6878-HD Decode Ranges 2 - 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter 3 Maintenance, Troubleshooting &
Technical Specifications Introduction This chapter provides suggested digital scanner and cradle maintenance, troubleshooting, technical specifications, and signal descriptions (pinouts). Maintenance Digital Scanner Cleaning the exit window is required. A dirty window may affect scanning accuracy.
Do not allow any abrasive material to touch the window.
Remove any dirt particles with a damp cloth.
Wipe the window using a tissue moistened with ammonia/water.
Do not spray water or other cleaning liquids directly into the window. The DS6878 design allows safe cleansing of the product plastics with a variety of cleaning products and disinfectants. If required, wipe the digital scanner with the following list of approved cleansers:
Super Sani-Cloth Wipes
Clorox Bleach
Windex Antimicrobial
Cavi-Wipes Isopropyl 70-80%
Virex 5 Wipes
Ethanol 80%
Gentle dish soap and water
3 - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Cradle
Do not pour, spray, or spill any liquid on the cradle. Wipe cradle using approved cleansers. CAUTION Avoid using cleansers directly on the digital scanner battery door, contacts and cradle contacts. Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to gently clean contacts. Battery Information Rechargeable battery packs are designed and constructed to the highest standards within the industry. However, there are limitations to how long a battery can operate or be stored before needing replacement. Many factors affect the life of a battery pack such as heat, cold, customer usage profiles, age and severe drops. When batteries are stored over a year, battery cell manufacturers advise that some irreversible deterioration in overall battery quality may occur. To minimize this loss, they recommend storing batteries half charged in a dry, cool place between 41 F and 77 F (5 C and 25 C), the cooler the better, and removed from the equipment to prevent the loss of capacity. Batteries should be charged to half capacity at least once a year. If an electrolyte leakage is observed, avoid any contact with the affected area and properly dispose of the battery. Replace the battery when a significant loss of run time is detected. Batteries must be charged within the 32 F to 104 F (0 C to 40C) temperature range. The standard warranty period for all Symbol batteries is 30 days, regardless if the battery was purchased separately or included as part of the mobile computer. For more information on Symbol batteries, please visit:
http://support.symbol.com/support/product/manuals.do Troubleshooting Table 3-1 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions Battery Digital Scanner battery requires frequent charging. Battery may need reconditioning. Restore the battery by performing a Digital Scanner displays solid red LED longer than 3 seconds when placed in cradle. Battery may require pre-charge due to excessive discharge. battery reconditioning cycle. See Reconditioning the Digital Scanner Battery on page 1-9 for more information. Wait for the red LED to turn green indicating that the scanner has begun normal charging. Recommend allowing battery to fully recharge. Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications 3 - 3 Table 3-1 Troubleshooting (Continued) Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions Beeper Indications Digital Scanner emits low/high/low beeps. ADF transmit error. Invalid ADF rule is detected. The Code 39 buffer was erased or there was an attempt to clear or transmit an empty buffer. See Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting for information about ADF programming. See Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting for information about ADF programming. Normal when scanning the Code 39 Buffering Clear Buffer bar code or upon attempt to transmit an empty Code 39 buffer. Digital Scanner emits a low/high/low/high beep sequence while it is being programmed. Out of ADF parameter storage space. Erase all rules and re-program with shorter rules. Digital Scanner emits long low/long high beeps. Input error, incorrect bar code or Cancel bar code was scanned. Page timeout; remote device is out of range/not powered. Scan the correct numeric bar codes within range for the parameter programmed. Move the digital scanner back into range of the remote device; try to re-connect; check remote device configuration. Digital Scanner emits long low/long high/long low/long high beeps. Out of host parameter storage space. Scan Default Parameters on page 5-4. Digital Scanner emits high/high/high/low beeps. Out of memory for ADF rules. Connection attempt was rejected by remote device. RS-232 receive error. Reduce the number of ADF rules or the number of steps in the ADF rules. Free up remote device resources. Normal during host reset. Otherwise, set the digital scanner's RS-232 parity to match the host setting. 3 - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 3-1 Troubleshooting (Continued) Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions Digital Scanner emits high/low beeps. The digital scanner is buffering Code 39 data. Or Keyboard parameter selected. Bluetooth disconnection event. Digital Scanner emits three long high beeps. Code 39 buffer is full. Digital Scanner emits four high beeps on trigger release. Low battery. Digital Scanner emits four long low beeps. A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol. The data is ignored. The digital scanner is either:
- Out of range
- Not paired to the cradle
- Not connected to a remote Bluetooth device. Acknowledgment that transmitted data was not received by the cradle. Normal. Or Enter value using bar code keypad. Move the digital scanner back into range of the remote device. In Master (SPP) mode, re-pair the digital scanner and cradle by scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle; check cradle power. In Slave (SPP/HID) mode, reestablish connection between the digital scanner and remote device from the remote device side. Scan the Code 39 bar code without a leading space or scan Do Not Buffer Code 39 on Code 39 Buffering - Scan
& Store on page 14-32 to transmit stored Code 29 data. Place digital scanner in cradle to charge the battery. This occurs if a unit is not properly configured. Check option setting. Move the digital scanner back into range of the remote device. Or Scan the PAIR bar code on the cradle. Data may have been received by the host. Check the host system for receipt of transmitted data. If data was not received by the host, re-scan the bar code. Digital Scanner emits five low long beeps. Decoding Bar Codes Digital Scanner emits the laser, but does not decode the bar code. Conversion or format error. Check ADF rules for the host. Digital Scanner is not programmed for the correct bar code type. Program the digital scanner to read that type of bar code. See Chapter 14, Symbologies. Bar code symbol is unreadable. Scan test symbols of the same bar code type to determine if the bar code is defaced. Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications 3 - 5 Table 3-1 Troubleshooting (Continued) Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions Distance between digital scanner and bar code is incorrect. Move the digital scanner closer to or further from the bar code. See Decode Ranges on page 2-7. The scan line is not crossing every bar and space of the symbol. Move the symbol until the scan line is within the acceptable aiming pattern. See Figure 2-1 on page 2-5. Digital Scanner decodes bar code, but does not transmit the data to the host. Digital Scanner is not programmed for the correct host type. Scan the appropriate host type programming bar code. See the chapter corresponding to the host type. Digital Scanner emits five long low beep after a bar code is decoded. Interface cable is loose. Ensure all cable connections are secure. Cradle is not programmed for the correct host interface. Check digital scanner host parameters or edit options. Digital Scanner not paired to host-connected interface. Cradle has lost connection to host. Conversion or format error was detected. The digital scanners conversion parameters are not properly configured. Conversion or format error was detected. An ADF rule was set up with characters that can't be sent for the host selected. Conversion or format error was detected. A bar code was scanned with characters that can't be sent for that host. Pair the digital scanner to the cradle by scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle. In this exact order: disconnect power supply; disconnect host cable; wait three seconds; reconnect host cable;
reconnect power supply; reestablish pairing. Ensure the digital scanners conversion parameters are properly configured. Change the ADF rule, or change to a host that can support the ADF rule. Change the bar code, or change to a host that can support the bar code. 3 - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 3-1 Troubleshooting (Continued) Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions Host Displays Host displays scanned data incorrectly. Digital Scanner is not programmed to work with the host. Ensure the proper host is selected. Scan the appropriate host type programming bar code. For RS-232, ensure the digital scanners communication parameters match the hosts settings. For a USB HID keyboard or Keyboard Wedge configuration, ensure the system is programmed for the correct keyboard type and language, and turn off the CAPS LOCK key. Ensure editing options (e.g., ADF, UPC-E to UPC-A Conversion) are properly programmed. Check the digital scanners host type parameters or editing options. Check the system power. If the configuration requires a power supply, re-connect the power supply. Check the battery. Ensure that end cap to battery chamber is secured. Trigger Nothing happens when the trigger is pulled. No power to the digital scanner. Interface/power cables are loose. Check for loose cable connections and Digital Scanner is disabled. The laser aiming or illumination does not appear when the trigger is pulled. No power to the digital scanner. re-connect cables. For Synapse or IBM-468x mode, enable the digital scanner via the host interface. Check battery and charging contacts;
ensure that end cap to battery chamber is secured; ensure all power and cable connections to cradle are secure. Interface/power cables are loose. Check battery and charging contacts;
ensure power and cable connections to cradle are secure. NOTE If after performing these checks the symbol still does not scan, contact the distributor or contact Motorola Enterprise Mobility Support. See page xix for contact information. Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications 3 - 7 Technical Specifications Table 3-2 Technical Specifications - Symbol DS6878 Digital Scanner Item Physical Characteristics Dimensions Description 7.3 in. H x 3.85 in. L x 2.7 in. W
(18.5 cm H x 9.7 cm L x 6.9 cm W) Weight (with battery) Approximately 8.4 oz. (238 g) Color Performance Characteristics Cash Register White or Twilight Black HC Configuration: Healthcare White Light Source:
Frame Rate Radio Range Battery Specifications Aiming Pattern: 650 nm laser diode Illumination: 630 nm LED Decode Mode: 60 fps Document Capture Mode: 10 fps Minimum 33 ft (10m) / Typical warehouse environment 50 ft. (15m) 720maH NiMH - (3) AAA number of scans per full charge: typically 8,500 @ 1 scan/second Charge Time:
Fully discharged battery: < 3 hours via external power / approximately 5.5 hours via host power through cable Roll Tolerance Pitch Tolerance Yaw Tolerance 360 60 60 Nominal Working Distance
(See Decode Ranges on page 2-7) Decode Capability Interfaces Supported User Environment Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Charging Temperature Humidity Drop Specifications UPC/EAN and with supplementals, Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Tri-optic Code 39, GS1 DataBar Variants, GS1-128, Code 128, Code 128 Full ASCII, Code 93, Codabar (NW1), Interleaved 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5 MSI, Codell, IATA, Bookland EAN, Code 32 See Table 3-3. 32 to 122 F (0 to 50 C)
-40 to 158 F (-40 to 70 C) 32 to 104 F (0 to 40 C) nominal, 41 to 95 F (5 to 35 C) ideal 5% to 95%, non-condensing Withstands multiple 6 ft./1.8 m drops to concrete at room temperature. Withstands multiple 5 ft./1.5m drops to concrete at 0 to 50 C. 3 - 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 3-2 Technical Specifications - Symbol DS6878 Digital Scanner (Continued) Description Item
# of Cradle Insertions Ambient Light Immunity 250,000+ insertions Incandescent - 150 ft. candles (1,600 Lux) Sunlight - 8,000 ft. candles (86,000 Lux) Flourescent - 150 ft. candles (1,600 Lux) Mercury Vapor - 150 ft. candles (1,600 Lux) Sodium Vapor - 150 ft. candles (1,600 Lux) Immune to normal or artificial light Regulatory Electrical Safety Laser Safety EMI/RFI Environmental Radio RF Exposure Accessories Lanyard UL 60950-1, C22.2 No. 60950-1, EN 60950-1, IEC 60950-1 EN 60825-1, IEC 60825-1, 21CFR1040.10 EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-17, IEC 60601-1-2, EN 55022, FCC Part 15 Class B, ICES 003 Class B, EN 55024, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3 European Union EMC Directive, Australian SMA RoHS Directive 2002/95/EEC EN 300 328 EN 50360, EN 50361, FCC Part 2, OET Bulletin 65, RSS102 Lanyard attaches to the battery door. Table 3-3 Technical Specifications - STB4278/STB4208 Cradle Item Physical Characteristics Description Dimensions:
2.0 in. H x 8.35 in. L x 3.4 in. W
(5 cm H x 21.1 cm L x 8.6 cm W) Weight Approximately 6.4 oz. (183 gm) Voltage & Current Charging Cradle:
Voltage 5 +/-10% VDC 5 +/-10% VDC 12 +/-10% VDC 12 +/-10% VDC Non-charging Cradle: 5V @ 70ma or 12 V @ 50 mA Current 700mA (External power) 475 mA (Host power through cable) 300 mA (External power) 220 mA (Host power through cable) Color Cash Register White or Twilight Black HC Configuration: Healthcare White Power Requirements 4.75 - 14.0 VDC Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications 3 - 9 Table 3-3 Technical Specifications - STB4278/STB4208 Cradle (Continued) Item Performance Characteristics Description Interfaces Supported
(CR0078-SC only) Features on-board Multiple Interface with: RS-232C (Standard, Nixdorf, ICL, & Fujitsu);
IBM 468x/469x; Keyboard Wedge; USB (Standard, IBM SurePOS, Macintosh);
Laser/Wand Emulation; 123Scan2; Remote Digital Scanner Management. In addition, Synapse Adaptive Connectivity allows for connectivity to all of the above plus many non-standard interfaces. User Environment Operating Temperature 32 to 122 F (0 to 50 C) Storage Temperature
-40 to 158 F (-40 to 70 C) Charging Temperature 32 to 104 F (0 to 40 C) nominal, 41 to 95 F (5 to 35 C) ideal Humidity Regulatory 5% to 95% (non-condensing) Electrical Safety UL 60950-1, C22.2 No. 60950-1, EN 60950-1, IEC 60950-1 EMI/RFI EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-17, IEC 60601-1-2, EN 55022, FCC Part 15 Class B, ICES 003 Class B, EN 55024, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3 European Union EMC Directive, Australian SMA Radio EN 300 328 Environmental RoHS Directive 2002/95/EEC RF Exposure Accessories EN 50360, EN 50361, FCC Part 2, OET Bulletin 65, RSS102 Mounting Options Desktop, mount on a wall, computer work station or medical cart. Power Supplies Power supplies are available for applications that do not supply power over host cable. 3 - 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Cradle Signal Descriptions The signal descriptions in Table 3-4 apply to the connector on the digital scanner and are for reference only. Table 3-4 Cradle Signal Pin-outs Pin IBM Synapse RS-232 Keyboard Wedge Wand USB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Reserved SynClock Reserved Reserved Reserved Jump to Pin 6 Power Ground Power Ground IBM_A(+) Reserved Reserved Reserved IBM_B(-) SynData Reserved Reserved Power Ground TxD RxD RTS CTS Power Ground KeyClock TermData KeyData Power Ground DBP CTS RTS Power Ground Reserved D +
Jump to Pin 1 TermClock Reserved D -
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Figure 3-1 illustrates the positions of the cradle pins. Pin 4 Pin 3 Pin 2 Pin 1 Figure 3-1 Cradle Pin Assignments The signal descriptions in Table 3-5 apply to the connector from the digital scanner to the digital scanner cradle and are for reference only. Table 3-5 Cradle Pin-outs Pin Description 1 2 3 4 CRADLE_TXD VCC GND CRADLE_RXD Chapter 4 Radio Communications Introduction This chapter provides information about the modes of operation and features available for wireless communication between digital scanners, cradles and hosts. The chapter also includes the parameters necessary to configure the digital scanner. The digital scanner ships with the settings shown in the Radio Communication Default Table on page 4-2 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous digital scanner defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary. To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the digital scanner is powered down. If not using a Synapse or USB cable with the cradle, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host. To return all features to default values, scan a default bar code in Default Parameters on page 5-4. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
* Indicates Default
*Disable Pair on Contacts Feature/Option Scanning Sequence Examples In most cases, scan one bar code to set a specific parameter value. Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter. 4 - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Radio Communications Parameter Defaults Table 4-1 lists the defaults for radio communication parameters. If you wish to change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Radio Communications Parameters section beginning on page 4-4. NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters. Table 4-1 Radio Communication Default Table Parameter Default Page Number Bluetooth Host (Host Type) Discoverable Mode Cradle Host General Country Keyboard Types (Country Code) North American HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay No Delay (0 msec) CAPS Lock Override Ignore Unknown Characters Emulate Keypad Keyboard FN1 Substitution Function Key Mapping Simulated Caps Lock Convert Case Beep on Reconnect Attempt Reconnect Attempt Interval Auto-reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation (HID Slave) Mode Modes of Operation
(Point-to-Point/Multipoint-to-Point Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable No Case Conversion Disable 30 sec On Bar Code Data Point-to-Point Parameter Broadcast (Cradle Host Only) Enable Pairing Modes Pairing on Contacts Connection Maintenance Interval Authentication Variable Pin Code Encryption Unlocked Disable 15 min Disable Static Disable 4-4 4-7 4-8 4-10 4-10 4-11 4-11 4-12 4-12 4-13 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-23 4-25 4-26 4-27 Radio Communications 4 - 3 Wireless Beeper Definitions When the digital scanner scans the pairing bar code it issues various beep sequences indicating successful or unsuccessful operations. Table 4-2 defines beep sequences that occur during pairing operations. (For additional beeper definitions, see Beeper Definitions on page 2-1.). Table 4-2 Wireless Beeper Definitions Beeper Sequence Four long low beeps Indication 1. A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol. The data is ignored. This occurs if a unit is not properly configured. Check option setting. 2. When communicating with a cradle, the cradle acknowledges receipt of data. If the acknowledgment is not received, this transmission error beep sequence sounds. Data may still have been received by the host. Check the host system for receipt of transmitted data. If data was not received by the host, re-scan the bar code. Five high beeps Emitted every 5 seconds while a reconnection attempt is in progress. (See Auto-reconnect Feature on page 4-14.) High/low/high/low beeps Pairing bar code scanned. Low/high beeps High/low beeps Bluetooth connection established. Bluetooth disconnection event. Note: When connected to a remote device using SPP or HID, if a disconnect beep sequence sounds immediately after a bar code is scanned, check the host device for receipt of transmitted data. It is possible that an attempt was made to transmit the last bar code scanned after the connection was lost. Long low/long high beeps Page timeout; remote device is out of range/not powered. (See Auto-reconnect Feature on page 4-14.) Long low/long high/long low/
long high beeps Connection attempt was rejected by remote device. Note: In the case of Pairing Methods on page 4-21, the cradle may already be connected to another digital scanner in single Point-to-Point locked mode, or the piconet may be full in Multipoint-to-Point mode. If Pair On Contacts is enabled and the digital scanner that is inserted is already connected to the cradle, no beeping occurs. 4 - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Radio Communications Host Types To set up the digital scanner for communication with a cradle, or to use standard Bluetooth profiles, scan the appropriate host type bar code below.
Cradle Host (default) - Select this host type for digital scanner(s) to cradle operation. The digital scanner must then be paired to the cradle and the cradle communicates directly to the host via the host interface cable connection.
Serial Port Profile (Master) - Select this host type for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support (see page 4-6). The digital scanner connects to the PC/host via Bluetooth and performs like theres a serial connection. The digital scanner initiates the connection to the remote device and is the Master. Scan Serial Port Profile
(Master), then scan the PAIR bar code for the remote device. See Pairing Bar Code Format on page 4-22 for information about creating a pairing bar code for a remote device.
Serial Port Profile (Slave) - Select this host type for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support (see page 4-6). The digital scanner connects to the PC/host via Bluetooth and performs like theres a serial connection. The digital scanner accepts incoming connection requested from a remote device and is the Slave. Scan Serial Port Profile (Slave) and wait for the incoming connection.
Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation (HID Slave) - Select this host type for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support.
(See page 4-6 for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support and Master/Slave definitions.) The digital scanner connects to the PC/host via Bluetooth and performs like a keyboard. The digital scanner accepts incoming connection requested from a remote device and is the slave. Scan Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation (HID Slave) and wait for the incoming connection. NOTE 1.The digital scanner supports keyboard emulation over the Bluetooth HID profile. For detailed information, and HID host parameters, see HID Host Parameters on page 4-8. 2. When the digital scanner is paired to the cradle in SPP Master or Cradle Host mode, the digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio losing communication. For more information see Auto-reconnect Feature on page 4-14. Radio Communications Host Types (continued) Radio Communications 4 - 5
*Cradle Host Serial Port Profile (Slave) Serial Port Profile (Master) Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation (HID Slave) 4 - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Bluetooth Technology Profile Support With Bluetooth Technology Profile Support, the cradle is not required for wireless communication. The digital scanner communicates directly to the host using Bluetooth technology. The digital scanner supports the standard Bluetooth Serial Port Profile (SPP) and HID Profiles which enable the digital scanner to communicate with other Bluetooth devices that support these profiles.
SPP - the digital scanner connects to the PC/host via Bluetooth and performs like theres a serial connection.
HID - the digital scanner connects to the PC/host via Bluetooth and performs like a keyboard. Master/Slave Set Up The digital scanner can be set up as a Master or Slave. When the digital scanner is set up as a Slave, it is discoverable and connectable to other devices. When the digital scanner is set up as a Master, the Bluetooth address of the remote device to which a connection is requested is required. A pairing bar code with the remote device address must be created and scanned to attempt a connection to the remote device. See the Pairing Bar Code Format on page 4-22 for information about creating a pairing bar code. Master When the digital scanner is set up as a Master (SPP), it initiates the radio connection to a slave device. Initiating the connection is done by scanning a pairing bar code for the remote device (see Pairing Bar Code Format on page 4-22). Slave When the digital scanner is set up as a Slave device (SPP), the digital scanner accepts an incoming connection request from a remote device. NOTE The number of digital scanners is dependent on the hosts capability. Radio Communications 4 - 7 Bluetooth Friendly Name You can set a meaningful name for the digital scanner that appears in the application during device discovery. The default name is the digital scanner name followed by its serial number, e.g., DS6878 123456789ABCDEF. Scanning Set Defaults reverts the digital scanner to this name; use custom defaults to maintain the user-programmed name through a Set Defaults operation. To set a new Bluetooth Friendly Name, scan the following bar code, then scan up to 23 characters from Appendix E, Alphanumeric Bar Codes. If the name contains less than 23 characters, scan End of Message on page E-7 after entering the name. NOTE If your application allows you to set a device name, this takes precedence over the Bluetooth Friendly Name. Bluetooth Friendly Name Discoverable Mode Select a discoverable mode based on the device initiating discovery:
Select General Discoverable Mode when initiating connection from a PC.
Select Limited Discoverable Mode when initiating connection from a mobile device (e.g., Motorola Q), and the device does not appear in General Discoverable Mode. Note that it can take longer to discover the device in this mode. The device remains in Limited Discoverable Mode for 30 seconds, and green LEDs flash while in this mode. It is then non-discoverable. To re-active Limited Discoverable Mode, press the trigger.
*General Discoverable Mode Limited Discoverable Mode 4 - 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide HID Host Parameters The digital scanner supports keyboard emulation over the Bluetooth HID profile. In this mode the digital scanner can interact with Bluetooth enabled hosts supporting the HID profile as a Bluetooth keyboard. Scanned data is transmitted to the host as keystrokes. Following are the keyboard parameters supported by the HID host. HID Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type.
*North American Standard Keyboards German Windows Spanish Windows French Windows French Canadian Windows 98 Italian Windows HID Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes - continued) Radio Communications 4 - 9 Swedish Windows Japanese Windows Portuguese/Brazilian Windows UK English Windows French Canadian Windows 2000/XP 4 - 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay This parameter sets the delay, in milliseconds, between emulated keystrokes. Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when the HID host requires a slower transmission of data.
*No Delay (0 msec) Medium Delay (20 msec) Long Delay (40 msec) HID CAPS Lock Override When enabled, the case of the data is preserved regardless of the state of the caps lock key. This setting is always enabled for the Japanese, Windows (ASCII) keyboard type and can not be disabled.
*Do Not Override Caps Lock Key
(Disable) Override Caps Lock Key
(Enable) Radio Communications 4 - 11 HID Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is scanned, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is scanned, bar codes containing at least one unknown character are not sent to the host, and an error beep sounds.
*Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters
(Enable) Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters
(Disable) Emulate Keypad When enabled, all characters are sent as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad. For example, ASCII A is sent as "ALT make" 0 6 5 "ALT Break."
*Disable Keypad Emulation Enable Keypad Emulation 4 - 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide HID Keyboard FN1 Substitution When enabled, this parameter allows replacement of any FN1 character in an EAN128 bar code with a Key Category and value chosen by the user. See FN1 Substitution Values on page 5-36 to set the Key Category and Key Value.
*Disable Keyboard FN1 Substitution Enable Keyboard FN1 Substitution HID Function Key Mapping ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control-key sequences. When this parameter is enabled, the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping (see Table 6-2 on page 6-120. Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled.
*Disable Function Key Mapping Enable Function Key Mapping Radio Communications 4 - 13 Simulated Caps Lock When enabled, the digital scanner inverts upper and lower case characters on the digital scanner bar code as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard. This inversion is done regardless of the current state of the keyboard Caps Lock state.
*Disable Simulated Caps Lock Convert Case When enabled, the digital scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case. Enable Simulated Caps Lock
*No Case Conversion Convert All to LowerCase Convert All to Upper Case 4 - 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Auto-reconnect Feature When in SPP Master or Cradle Host mode, the digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio losing communication. This can happen if the digital scanner goes out of range with the remote device, or if the remote device powers down. The digital scanner tries to reconnect for the period of time specified by the Reconnect Attempt Interval setting. During that time the green LED continues to blink. If the auto-reconnect process fails due to page time-outs, the digital scanner sounds a page timeout beep (long low/long high) and enters low power mode. The auto-reconnect process can be re-started by pulling the digital scanner trigger. If the auto-reconnect process fails because the remote device rejects the connection attempt, the digital scanner sounds a connection reject beep sequence (see Wireless Beeper Definitions on page 4-3) and deletes the remote pairing address. If this happens, a pairing bar code must be scanned to attempt a new connection to the remote device. NOTE If a bar code is scanned while the auto-reconnect sequence is in process, a transmission error beep sequence sounds and the data is not transmitted to the host. After a connection is reestablished, normal scanning operation returns. For error beep sequence definitions, see Beeper Definitions on page 2-1. The digital scanner has memory available for storing a remote Bluetooth address for each Master mode (SPP, Cradle). When switching between these modes, the digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to the last device it was connected to in that mode. NOTE Switching between Bluetooth host types by scanning a host type bar code (page 4-4) causes the radio to be reset. Scanning is disabled during this time. It takes several seconds for the digital scanner to re-initialize the radio at which time scanning is enabled. Reconnect Attempt Beep Feedback When a digital scanner disconnects as it goes out of range, it immediately attempts to reconnect. While the digital scanner attempts to reconnect, the green LED continues to blink. If the auto-reconnect process fails, the digital scanner emits a page timeout beep (long low/long high) and stops blinking the LED. The process can be restarted by pulling the trigger. The Beep on Reconnect Attempt feature is disabled by default. When enabled, the digital scanner emits 5 short high beeps every 5 seconds while the reconnection attempt is in progress. Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Beep on Reconnect Attempt. Radio Communications 4 - 15
*Disable Beep on Reconnect Attempt Reconnect Attempt Interval When a digital scanner disconnects as it goes out of range, it immediately attempts to reconnect for the default time interval of 30 seconds. This time interval can be changed to one of the following options:
Enable Beep on Reconnect Attempt 30 seconds 1 minute 5 minutes 30 minutes 1 hour Indefinitely. To set the Reconnect Attempt Interval, scan one of the bar codes below
*Attempt to Reconnect for 30 Seconds Attempt to Reconnect for 1 Minute Attempt to Reconnect for 5 Minutes
4 - 16 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Reconnect Attempt Interval (continued) Attempt to Reconnect for 1 Hour Attempt to Reconnect for 30 Minutes Attempt to Reconnect Indefinitely Radio Communications 4 - 17 Auto-reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation (HID Slave) Mode In Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation (HID Slave) mode, select a re-connect option for when the digital scanner loses its connection with a remote device:
Auto-reconnect on Bar Code Data: The digital scanner auto-reconnects when you scan a bar code. With this option, a delay can occur when transmitting the first characters. The digital scanner sounds a decode beep upon bar code scan, followed by a connection, a page timeout, a rejection beep, or a transmission error beep. Select this option to optimize battery life on the digital scanner and mobile device. Note that auto-reconnect does not occur on rejection and cable unplug commands.
Auto-reconnect Immediately: When the digital scanner loses connection, it attempts to reconnect. If a page timeout occurs, the digital scanner attempts reconnect on a trigger pull. Select this option if the digital scanners battery life is not an issue and you do not want a delay to occur when the first bar code is transmitted. Note that auto-reconnect does not occur on rejection and cable unplug commands.
Disable Auto-reconnect: When the digital scanner loses connection, you must re-establish it manually.
*Auto-reconnect on Bar Code Data Auto-reconnect Immediately Disable Auto-reconnect Out of Range Indicator An out of range indicator can be set by scanning Enable Beep on Reconnect Attempt on page 4-15 and extending the time using the Reconnect Attempt Interval on page 4-15. For example, with Beep on Reconnect Attempt disabled while the digital scanner loses radio connection when it is taken out of range, the digital scanner attempts to reconnect silently during the time interval set by scanning a Reconnect Attempt Interval. When Beep on Reconnect Attempt is enabled, the digital scanner emits 5 high beeps every 5 seconds while the reconnection attempt is in progress. If the Reconnect Attempt Interval is adjusted to a longer period of time, such as 30 minutes, the digital scanner emits 5 high beeps every 5 seconds for 30 minutes providing an out of range indicator. 4 - 18 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Digital Scanner(s) To Cradle Support Modes of Operation The charging cradle with radio supports two radio communication modes of operation, allowing the digital scanner to communicate wirelessly:
Point-to-Point
Multipoint-to-Point. Point-to-Point Communication In Point-to-Point communication mode, the cradle allows one digital scanner to connect to it at a time. In this mode, the digital scanner is paired to the cradle either by insertion into the cradle (if pairing on contacts is enabled, page 4-21), or by scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle. Communication can be locked, unlocked (default), or in a lock override state (see Pairing Modes on page 4-20). In locked mode, locking intervals must be set by scanning a connection maintenance interval bar code beginning on page 4-23. To activate this mode of operation, scan Point-to-Point. Multipoint-to-Point Communication In Multipoint-to-Point communication mode, up to three digital scanners can be paired to one cradle. To activate this mode, the first digital scanner connected to the cradle must scan the Multipoint-to-Point bar code. This mode allows a parameter broadcast (page 4-19) feature that forwards parameter bar code settings to all connected digital scanners. In this mode, programming one digital scanner applies the settings to all connected digital scanners. To select Point-to-Point or Multipoint-to-Point mode, scan the appropriate bar code. Multipoint-to-Point Mode
*Point-to-Point Mode Radio Communications 4 - 19 Parameter Broadcast (Cradle Host Only) When in multipoint-to-point mode, enable Parameter Broadcast to broadcast all parameter bar codes scanned to all other digital scanners in the piconet. If disabled, parameter bar codes are processed by the individual digital scanner only, and the digital scanner ignores parameters broadcast from other digital scanners or from the cradle.
*Enable Parameter Broadcast Disable Parameter Broadcast Pairing Pairing is the process by which a digital scanner initiates communication with a cradle. Scanning Multipoint-to-Point activates multi digital scanner-to-cradle operation and allows up to three digital scanners to pair to one cradle. The cradle includes a pairing bar code. To pair the digital scanner with the cradle, scan the pairing bar code on the cradle. A high/low/high/low beep sequence indicates that the pairing bar code was decoded. When a connection between the cradle and digital scanner is established, a low/high beep sounds. NOTE 1. The pairing bar code that connects the digital scanner to a cradle is unique to each cradle. 2. Do not scan data or parameters until pairing completes. 3. When the digital scanner is paired to the cradle in SPP Master or Cradle Host mode, the digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio losing communication. For more information see Auto-reconnect Feature on page 4-14. 4 - 20 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Pairing Modes When operating with the cradle, two modes of pairing are supported:
Locked Pairing Mode - When a cradle is paired (connected) to the digital scanner (or to three digital scanners in Multipoint-to-Point mode), any attempt to connect a different digital scanner, by either scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle or by inserting it into the cradle with the pairing on contacts feature enabled (page 4-21), is rejected. The currently connected digital scanner(s) maintain connection. In this mode, you must set a Connection Maintenance Interval on page 4-23.
Unlocked Pairing Mode - Pair (connect) a new digital scanner to a cradle at any time by either scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle or by inserting it into the cradle with the pairing on contacts feature enabled. This unpairs the previous digital scanner from the cradle (Point-to-Point mode only). NOTE In Multipoint-to-Point mode, pairing a fourth digital scanner while in Unlocked Pairing Mode replaces any disconnected (out of range) digital scanner. However, if three digital scanners are actively connected to the cradle, a fourth digital scanner cannot connect unless you first disconnect one of the original digital scanners by scanning the Unpair bar code. To set the cradle pairing mode, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Unlocked Pairing Mode Locked Pairing Mode Lock Override Lock Override overrides a locked digital scanner base pairing and connects a new digital scanner. In Multipoint-to-Point mode, this unpairs any disconnected (out of range) digital scanner first, in order to connect the new digital scanner. To use Lock Override, scan the bar code below, followed by the pairing bar code on the cradle. LockOverride
Radio Communications 4 - 21 Pairing Methods There are two pairing methods. The default method allows the digital scanner and cradle to pair (connect) when the pairing bar code on the cradle is scanned. A second method pairs the digital scanner and cradle when the digital scanner is inserted in the cradle. To enable this feature, scan Enable Pair On Contacts below. With this feature enabled it is not necessary to scan the pairing bar code on the cradle. If the pairing is successful, a low/high connection beep sequence sounds a few seconds after the digital scanner is placed in the cradle. See Wireless Beeper Definitions on page 4-3 for other beep sequences. To enable or disable pairing on contacts, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable Pair On Contacts Disable Pair on Contacts Unpairing Unpair the digital scanner from the cradle or PC/host to make the cradle available for pairing with another digital scanner. Scan the bar code below to disconnect the digital scanner from its cradle/PC host. An unpairing bar code is also included in the Symbol DS6878 Quick Reference Guide. Unpairing 4 - 22 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Pairing Bar Code Format When the digital scanner is configured as an SPP Master, you must create a pairing bar code for the remote Bluetooth device to which the digital scanner can connect. The Bluetooth address of the remote device must be known. Pairing bar codes are Code 128 bar codes and are formatted as follows:
<Fnc 3>Bxxxxxxxxxxxx where:
B (or LNKB) is the prefix xxxxxxxxxxxx represents the 12-character Bluetooth address. Pairing Bar Code Example If the remote device to which the digital scanner can connect has a Bluetooth address of 11:22:33:44:55:66, then the pairing bar code is:
Paring Bar Code Content:
B + Bluetooth Address B112233445566
Radio Communications 4 - 23 Connection Maintenance Interval NOTE The Connection Maintenance Interval only applies in locked pairing mode (see page 4-20). When a digital scanner disconnects from a cradle due to a Link Supervision Timeout, the digital scanner immediately attempts to reconnect to the cradle for 30 seconds. If the auto-reconnect process fails, it can be restarted by pulling the digital scanner trigger. To guarantee that a disconnected digital scanner can reconnect when it comes back in range, the cradle reserves the connection for that digital scanner for a period of time defined by the Connection Maintenance Interval. If the cradle is supporting the maximum three digital scanners and one digital scanner disconnects, a fourth digital scanner cannot pair to the cradle during this interval. To connect another digital scanner: either wait until the connection maintenance interval expires then scan the PAIR bar code on the cradle with the new digital scanner;
or, scan Lock Override (page 4-20) with the new digital scanner then scan the PAIR bar code on the cradle. NOTE When the cradle supports the maximum three digital scanners, it stores the remote pairing address of each digital scanner in memory regardless of the digital scanner condition (e.g., discharged battery). When you want to change the digital scanners paired to the cradle, unpair each digital scanner currently connected to the cradle by scanning the Unpairing bar code prior and reconnect each appropriate digital scanner by scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle. Connection Maintenance Interval options are:
15 minutes 30 minutes
One hour Two hours Four hours
Eight hours 24 hours Indefinitely. Considerations The system administrator determines the Connection Maintenance Interval. A shorter interval allows new users to gain access to abandoned connections more quickly, but causes problems if users leave the work area for extended periods. A longer interval allows existing users to leave the work area for longer periods of time, but ties up the system for new users. To avoid this conflict, users who are going off-shift can scan the unpair bar code on page 4-21 to ignore the Connection Maintenance Interval and make the connection immediately available.
4 - 24 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide To set the Connection Maintenance Interval, scan one of the bar codes below
*Set Interval to 15 Minutes Set Interval to 60 Minutes Set Interval to 4 Hours Set Interval to 24 Hours Set Interval to 30 Minutes Set Interval to 2 Hours Set Interval to 8 Hours Set Interval to Forever Radio Communications 4 - 25 Bluetooth Security The digital scanner supports Bluetooth Authentication and Encryption. Authentication can be requested by either the remote device or the digital scanner. When Authentication is requested, the digital scanner uses its programmed PIN code to generate a link key. Once Authentication is complete, either device may then negotiate to enable Encryption. NOTE A remote device can still request Authentication. Authentication To force Authentication with a remote device (including the cradle), scan the Enable Authentication bar code below. To prevent the digital scanner from forcing Authentication, scan the Disable Authentication bar code below. Enable Authentication
*Disable Authentication 4 - 26 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide PIN Code To set the PIN code (e.g., password) on the digital scanner, scan the bar code below followed by five alphanumeric programming bar codes (see Appendix E, Alphanumeric Bar Codes. The default PIN code is 12345. If the digital scanner communicates with a cradle with security enabled, synchronize the PIN codes on the digital scanner and cradle. To achieve this, connect the digital scanner to the cradle when setting the PIN codes. If the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle, the PIN code change only takes affect on the digital scanner. If security is required between the digital scanner and cradle, and the PIN codes do not match, pairing fails. If the PIN codes are not synchronized, re-synchronize them by disabling security, establishing a connection to the cradle, and then programming a new PIN code. Set PIN Code Variable PIN Code The default PIN code is the user-programmed Static PIN Code. Typically, however, HID connections require entering a Variable PIN Code. If, when attempting connection, the application presents a text box that includes a PIN, scan the Variable PIN Code bar code, then re-attempt connection. When you hear a beep indicating the digital scanner is waiting for an alphanumeric entry, enter the provided variable PIN using the Alphanumeric Bar Codes on page E-1, then scan End of Message on page E-7 if the code is less than 16 characters. The digital scanner discards the variable PIN code after connection.
*Static PIN Code Variable PIN Code Radio Communications 4 - 27 Encryption NOTE Authentication must be performed before Encryption can take effect. To set up the digital scanner for enabling Encryption, scan Enable Encryption. To prevent the digital scanner from enabling Encryption, scan Disable Encryption. When enabled, the radio encrypts data. Enable Encryption
* Disable Encryption 4 - 28 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter 5 User Preferences & Miscella-
neous Digital Scanner Options Introduction If desired, program the digital scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes imaging preference features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features. The digital scanner ships with the settings in User Preferences Parameter Defaults on page 5-2 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary. To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when you power down the digital scanner. NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars and/or spaces are not merging. If not using a USB cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connecting to a new host. To return all features to default values, scan the Default Parameters on page 5-4. Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates Default
*Enable Decode Aiming Pattern
(02h) Feature/Option Option Hex Value for programming via SSI command 5 - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Scanning Sequence Examples In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to set the beeper tone to high, scan the High Frequency (beeper tone) bar code listed under Beeper Tone on page 5-7. The digital scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry. Other parameters require scanning several bar codes. See these parameter descriptions for this procedure. Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter. User Preferences/Miscellaneous Option Parameter Defaults Table 5-1 lists the defaults for preferences parameters. To change the default values:
Scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide. These new values replace the standard default values in memory. To recall the default parameter values, scan the Default Parameters on page 5-4.
Configure the digital scanner using the 123Scan2 configuration program (see 123Scan2 on page 12-1). NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters. Table 5-1 User Preferences Parameter Defaults Parameter Parameter Number Default Page Number User Preferences Set Default Parameter Parameter Bar Code Scanning Beep After Good Decode Suppress Power Up Beeps Beeper Tone Beeper Volume Beeper Duration Beep on Insertion Batch Mode Low Power Mode Time Delay to Reduced Power Mode ECh 38h Set Defaults Enable Enable F1h D1h Do Not Suppress 91h 8Ch F1 74h F0h 20h F1h 20h 80h 92h Medium High Medium Enabled Normal (Do Not Batch Data) Enabled 100 MSec Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Aim F1h D9h 15 Sec 5-4 5-5 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-9 5-10 5-12 5-13 5-14 User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 - 3 Parameter Parameter Number Hand-Held Trigger Mode Picklist Mode Mobile Phone/Display Mode Continuous Bar Code Read Unique Bar Code Reporting Decode Session Timeout Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols Fuzzy 1D Processing Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern Decoding Illumination Multicode Mode Multicode Expression Multicode Mode Concatenation Multicode Concatenation Symbology Miscellaneous Options Transmit Code ID Character Prefix Value Suffix 1 Value Suffix 2 Value Scan Data Transmission Format 8Ah F0h 92h F1h CCh F1 89h F1h D3h 88h 89h 90h F1h 02h F0h 32h F0h, 2Ah F1h, A5h F1h, 95h F1h, CDh F1h, D2h 2Dh 63h, 69h 62h 68h 64h 6Ah EBh Default Level Disabled Always Disable Disable Disable 9.9 Sec 0.5 Sec 0.2 Sec Enable Enable Enable Disable 1 Disable Page Number 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-20 5-21 5-22 5-23 5-23 5-24 5-29 Concatenate as PDF417 5-30 None 7013 <CR><LF>
7013 <CR><LF>
Data as is 5-33 5-34 5-34 5-35 5-36 5-37 FN1 Substitution Values 67h 6Dh Set Transmit No Read Message 5Eh Disable 5 - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide User Preferences Default Parameters The scanner can be reset to two types of defaults: factory defaults or custom defaults. Scan the appropriate bar code below to reset the scanner to its default settings and/or set the scanners current settings as the custom default.
Restore Defaults - Resets all default parameters as follows:
If custom default values were configured (see Write to Custom Defaults), the custom default values are set for all parameters each time the Restore Defaults bar code below is scanned. If no custom default values were configured, the factory default values are set for all parameters each time the Restore Defaults bar code below is scanned. (For factory default values, see Chapter A, Standard Default Parameters beginning on page A-1.)
Set Factory Defaults - Scan the Set Factory Defaults bar code below to eliminate all custom default values and set the scanner to factory default values. (For factory default values, see Chapter A, Standard Default Parameters beginning on page A-1.)
Write to Custom Defaults - Custom default parameters can be configured to set unique default values for all parameters. After changing all parameters to the desired default values, scan the Write to Custom Defaults bar code below to configure custom defaults.
*Restore Defaults Write to Custom Defaults Set Factory Defaults
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 - 5 Parameter Bar Code Scanning Parameter # ECh To disable the decoding of parameter bar codes, including the Set Defaults parameter bar codes, scan the Disable Parameter Scanning bar code below. To enable decoding of parameter bar codes, scan Enable Parameter Scanning.
*Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning
(01h) Disable Parameter Bar Code Scanning
(00h) Beep After Good Decode Parameter # 38h Scan a bar code below to select whether or not the digital scanner beeps after a good decode. If selecting Do Not Beep After Good Decode, the beeper still operates during parameter menu scanning and to indicate error conditions.
*Beep After Good Decode
(Enable)
(01h) Do Not Beep After Good Decode
(Disable)
(00h) 5 - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Suppress Power Up Beeps Parameter # F1h D1h Scan a bar code below to select whether or not to suppress digital scanner beeps upon power up..
*Do Not Supress Power Up Beeps
(00h) Supress Power Up Beeps
(01h) User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 - 7 Beeper Tone Parameter # 91h To select a decode beep frequency (tone), scan one of the following bar codes. Off
(03h)
*Medium Tone
(01h) Medium to High Tone (2-tone)
(04h) Low Tone
(02h) High Tone
(00h) 5 - 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Beeper Volume Parameter # 8Ch To select a beeper volume, scan the Low Volume, Medium Volume, or High Volume bar code. Low Volume
(02h)
*High Volume
(00h) Medium Volume
(01h) User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 - 9 Beeper Duration Parameter # F1 74h To select the duration for the beeper, scan one of the following bar codes. Short
(00h) Long
(02h)
* Medium
(01h) Beep on Insertion When a digital scanner is inserted into a cradle and detects power, it emits a short low beep. This feature is enabled by default. To enable or disable beeping on insertion, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable Beep on Insertion Disable Beep on Insertion 5 - 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Batch Mode The digital scanner supports three versions of batch mode. When the digital scanner is configured for any of the batch modes, it attempts to store bar code data (not parameter bar codes) until transmission is initialized, or the maximum number of bar codes are stored. When a bar code is saved successfully, a good decode beep sounds and the LED flashes green. If the digital scanner is unable to store a new bar code, a low/high/low/high out of memory beep sounds. (See pages 2-1, 2-3 and 4-3 for all beeper and LED definitions.) In all modes, calculate the amount of data (number of bar codes) the digital scanner can store as follows:
Number of storable bar codes = 30,720 bytes of memory / (number of characters in the bar code + 3). NOTE If the batch mode selection is changed while there is batched data, the new batch mode will take effect only after all the previously batched data is sent. Modes of Operation
Normal (default) - Do not batch data. The digital scanner attempts to transmit every scanned bar code.
Out of Range Batch Mode - The digital scanner starts storing bar code data when it loses its connection to a remote device (for example, when a user holding the digital scanner walks out of range). Data transmission is triggered by reestablishing the connection with the remote device (for example, when a user holding the digital scanner walks back into range).
Standard Batch Mode - The digital scanner starts storing bar code data after Enter Batch Mode is scanned. Data transmission is triggered by scanning Send Batch Data. NOTE Transmission is halted if the connection to the remote device is lost.
Cradle Contact Batch Mode - The digital scanner starts storing bar code data when Enter Batch Mode is scanned. Data transmission is triggered by insertion of the digital scanner into the cradle. NOTE If the digital scanner is removed from the cradle during batch data transfer, transmission halts until the digital scanner is re-inserted in the cradle. In all modes, transmissions are halted if the digital scanner is moved out of range. The digital scanner resumes when it is back in range. If a bar code is scanned while batch data is transmitted it is appended to the end of the batched data; parameter bar codes are not stored. User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 - 11 Batch Mode (continued)
*Normal Standard Batch Mode Enter Batch Mode Out of Range Batch Mode Cradle Contact Batch Mode Send Batch Data 5 - 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Low Power Mode Parameter # 80h If enabled, the digital scanner enters a low power consumption mode after Sleep Mode has expired, in which the LEDs turn off in order to conserve energy and prolong the life of the scanner. The digital scanner wakes when it is lifted, senses a trigger pull, or when the host attempts to communicate. If disabled, power remains on after each decode attempt. Disable Low Power Mode
(00h)
*Enable Low Power Mode
(01h) User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 - 13 Time Delay to Reduced Power Mode Parameter # 92h This parameter sets the time it takes the digital scanner to enter reduced power mode after any scanning activity. Scan the appropriate bar code below to set the time. 1 sec 3 secs 5 secs 500 msecs 2 secs 4 secs
*100 msecs 5 - 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Aim Parameter # F1h D9h This parameter sets the time the digital scanner remains in auto aim before entering low power mode. Disabled
*15 secs 1 minute 5 secs 30 secs User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 - 15 Hand-Held Trigger Mode Parameter # 8Ah Select one of the following trigger modes for the digital scanner:
Standard (Level) - A trigger pull activates decode processing. Decode processing continues until the bar code decodes, you release the trigger, or the Decode Session Timeout occurs.
Presentation (Blink) - The digital scanner activates decode processing when it detects a bar code in its field of view. After a period of non-use, the digital scanner enters a low power mode, in which the LEDs turn off until the digital scanner senses motion. NOTE Laser scanning is not applicable in hand-held presentation mode.
Auto Aim - If the primary trigger (trigger A) is set to imager, this trigger mode turns on the laser aiming pattern when you lift the digital scanner. A trigger pull activates decode processing. After 2 seconds of inactivity the aiming pattern shuts off. Standard (Level)
(00h)
*Auto Aim
(09h) 5 - 16 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Picklist Mode Parameter # F0h 92h Picklist mode enables the digital scanner to decode only bar codes that are aligned under the laser crosshair. Select one of the following picklist modes for the digital scanner:
Disabled Always - Picklist mode is always disabled.
Enabled in Hand-Held Mode - Picklist mode is enabled in hand-held mode.
*Disabled Always
(00h) Enabled in Hand-Held Mode
(01h) User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 - 17 Mobile Phone/Display Mode Parameter # F1h CCh Select Enable Mobile Phone/Display Mode to improve bar code reading performance off mobile phones and electronic displays.
*Disable Mobile Phone/Display Mode
(00h) Enable Mobile Phone/Display Mode
(01h) 5 - 18 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Continuous Bar Code Read Parameter # F1 89h Enable this to report every bar code while the trigger is pressed. NOTE Motorola strongly recommends enabling Picklist Mode on page 5-16 with this feature. Disabling Picklist Mode can cause accidental decodes when more than one bar code is in the imaging engine's field of view.
*Disable Continuous Bar Code Read
(0h) Enable Continuous Bar Code Read
(1h) Unique Bar Code Reporting Parameter # F1h D3h Enable this to report only unique bar codes while the trigger is pressed. This option only applies when Continuous Bar Code Read is enabled.
*Disable Continuous Bar Code Read Uniqueness
(00h) Enable Continuous Bar Code Read Uniqueness
(01h) User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 - 19 Decode Session Timeout Parameter # 88h This parameter sets the maximum time decode processing continues during a scan attempt. It is programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.5 to 9.9 seconds. The default timeout is 9.9 seconds. To set a Decode Session Timeout, scan the bar code below. Next, scan two numeric bar codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired on time. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. For example, to set a Decode Session Timeout of 0.5 seconds, scan the bar code below, then scan the 0 and 5 bar codes. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. Decode Session Timeout 5 - 20 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol Parameter # 89h Use this option in presentation mode and Continuous Bar Code Read to prevent the beeper from continuously beeping when a symbol is left in the digital scanners field of view. It is programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.0 to 9.9 seconds. The default interval is 0.5 seconds. To select the timeout between decodes for the same symbol, scan the bar code below, then scan two numeric bar codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired interval, in 0.1 second increments. Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols Parameter # 90h Use this option in presentation mode and Continuous Bar Code Read to control the time the scanner is inactive between decoding different symbols. It is programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.1 to 9.9 seconds. The default is 0.2 seconds. To select the timeout between decodes for different symbols, scan the bar code below, then scan two numeric bar codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired interval, in 0.1 second increments. Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 - 21 Fuzzy 1D Processing Parameter # F1h 02h This option is enabled by default to optimize decode performance on 1D bar codes, including damaged and poor quality symbols. Disable this only if you experience time delays when decoding 2D bar codes, or in detecting a no decode.
*Enable Fuzzy 1D Processing
(01h) Disable Fuzzy 1D Processing
(00h) 5 - 22 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern Parameter # F0h, 32h Select Enable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern to project the aiming pattern during bar code capture, Disable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern to turn the aiming pattern off, or Enable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF to project the aiming pattern when the digital scanner detects a 2D bar code. NOTE With Picklist Mode on page 5-16 enabled, the decode aiming pattern flashes even when the Decode Aiming Pattern is disabled.
*Enable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern
(02h) Enable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF
(03h) Disable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern
(00h) User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 - 23 Decoding Illumination Parameter # F0h, 2Ah Selecting Enable Decoding Illumination causes the digital scanner to flash illumination to aid decoding. Select Disable Decoding Illumination to prevent the digital scanner from using decoding illumination. Enabling illumination usually results in superior images. The effectiveness of the illumination decreases as the distance to the target increases.
*Enable Decoding Illumination
(01h) Disable Decoding Illumination
(00h) Multicode Mode Parameter # F1h, A5h Enable this parameter to allow multiple bar codes to decode upon one trigger event based on the programmed multicode expression. The digital scanner reports a successful decode and provides user indication only if it decodes all bar codes indicated by the multicode expression, otherwise the decode fails. Bar codes are transmitted in the order defined in the multicode expression. Disable this to operate in normal decode mode. When using this mode, disable Continuous Bar Code Read on page 5-18, and always orient the digital scanner at the same distance and angle (perpendicular).
*Disable Multicode Mode
(00h) Enable Multicode Mode
(01h) 5 - 24 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Multicode Expression Parameter # F1h, 95h Use this feature to program a multicode expression for Multicode Mode (grid method). The default is 1, which indicates any bar code. To set the multicode expression:
1. Scan the bar code below. 2. Scan bar codes from the alphanumeric keyboard in the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide to define the expression. 3. Scan the End of Message bar code from the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide. Multicode Expression Multicode Expression Syntax
[n] [Element 1]; [Element 2 ]; ... [Element n];
Where:
n is the number of elements in the overall expression. The multicode expression describes the bar code(s) that the digital scanner can expect to find in an image. Each element represents one bar code in the digital scanner's field of view. The order of elements in the expression is the order in which bar code data from each element transmits to the host. Elements are defined using one or more of the following methods:
By Region. This type of element limits decoding to a specific area within the digital scanner's field of view. Region coordinates are defined as the top left and bottom right corners of the region, expressed in percentages of the field of view. These can range from 0% to 100%, or 0x00 to 0x64 in hex, for both horizontal and vertical axes. A region element is constructed as:
[R] [4] [Top, Left] [Bottom, Right]
Where:
[R] is the character R
[4] is 0x04, indicating there are four bytes thereafter to describe the region
[Top, Left] are two values representing the top left corner of the region
[Bottom, Right] are two values representing the bottom right corner of the region
By Code Type. An element can specify a specific bar code symbology to find and decode somewhere in the field of view. A code type element is constructed as:
[C] [2] [Code Type]
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 - 25 Where:
[C] is the character C
[2] is 0x02, indicating there are two bytes thereafter to describe the code type
[Code Type] is the desired symbology's parameter number (see Chapter 14, Symbologies). For single-byte parameter numbers, extend the value to two bytes by adding 00 before the parameter number. Defining Multicode Expression Notes When defining multicode expressions consider the following:
Use the Code Type specifier if there are bar codes of more than one code type in view.
Always use the Region specifier when there are multiple bar codes of the same code type.
When transmission order is important (the first element in the expression transmits first), use either type to define the order.
When there are unwanted bar codes in view, filter them out in one of two ways:
Use Code Type to specify only the target bar codes.
Use Region to identify only the target bar codes. If the expression does not contain a Region specifier, scanning angle and distance do not matter. If you specify a region you must scan in a fixed orientation and at a fixed distance. Because of this, it is preferable to use the Code Type specifier rather than the Region specifier.
When defining regions:
Defining a region much larger than the bar code improves tolerance to scan distance and angle, but can cause a decode of a nearby bar code instead of the target bar code. Therefore, for best performance define larger regions when only a few bar codes are in view and those in view are widely separated.
Defining a region close to (or smaller than) the target bar code improves the probability of decoding this bar code rather than one nearby, but scan distance and angle must be more accurate. Therefore, for best performance define small regions when many bar codes are in view or those in view are close together.
Use Region elements to improve decode speeds by reducing the image area to search for the target bar code.
Specifying Code Type may also improve decode speeds for some code types.
Although you can scan parameter bar codes when multicode mode is enabled, be aware of the following: If the multicode expression defined a region(s), to scan a parameter bar code you must position the bar code within the first region defined in the expression. In some cases, this first region is not the center of the image and aiming at the parameter bar code does not result in a successful decode. The following examples show the multicode expressions in both hex and decimal formats, however in the sample figures the values are decimal. Be sure to use the correct base numbering system when creating an expression. A region specified as 0x00 0x00 0x64 0x32 represents a region with coordinates of Top-Left (0,0) and Bottom Right
(100,50).
5 - 26 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Example 1 To decode one Code 128 bar code anywhere in the image (even when bar codes of other types are in view), as in Figure 5-1, program the expression as follows:
The expression in decimal is (formatted for readability):
1 C 2 0 8 ;
To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is (spaces are for readability):
[MultiCode-Expression] 01 C 02 00 08 ; [End Of Message]
To program the expression via host command (SSI/SNAPI) the sequence is:
0x01 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x3b 0%
0%
PDF417 Code 50%
100%
50%
100%
Figure 5-1 Multicode Expression Example 1 Code 128 Code UPC-A Code 0 12345 67890 5 User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 - 27 Example 2a To decode a Code128 (Code Type=8) on the top half of the image and a PDF417 (Code Type=15) on the bottom half of the image, as in Figure 5-2, program the expression as follows:
The expression in decimal is (formatted for readability):
2 C 2 0 8 R 4 0 0 100 50 ; C 2 0 15 R 4 0 50 100 100 ;
To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is:
[MultiCode-Expression] 02 C 02 00 08 R 04 00 00 64 32 ; C 02 00 0F R 04 00 32 64 64 ; [End Of Message]
To program the expression via host command (SSI/SNAPI) the sequence is:
0x02 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x64 0x32 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x0F 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x32 0x64 0x64 0x3B Example 2b In Figure 5-2, if the bottom PDF417 bar code must transmit first, reverse the sequence of the two bar codes:
The expression in decimal is (formatted for readability):
2 C 2 0 15 R 4 0 50 100 100 ; C 2 0 8 R 4 0 0 100 50 ;
To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is:
[MultiCode-Expression] 02 C 02 00 0F R 04 00 32 64 64 ; C 02 00 08 R 04 00 00 64 32 ; [End Of Message]
To program the expression via host command (SSI/SNAPI) the sequence is:
0x02 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x0F 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x32 0x64 0x64 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x64 0x32 0x3B 50%
100%
Code 128 Code 0%
0%
(0,0) 50%
(0,50) PDF417 Code 100%
Figure 5-2 Multicode Expression Example 2
(100,50)
(160,100) 5 - 28 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Example 3 To decode the set of three bar codes while excluding the center Code 128 bar code, as in Figure 5-3, the expression is:
The expression in decimal is (formatted for readability):
3 C 2 0 15 R 4 0 0 50 50 ; C 2 [F0 24] R 4 70 0 100 40 ; C 2 0 8 R 4 65 60 100 100 ;
To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is:
[MultiCode-Expression] 03 C 02 00 0F R 04 00 00 32 32 ; C 02 F0 24 R 04 46 00 64 28 ;
C 02 00 08 R 04 41 3C 64 64 ; [End Of Message]
To program the expression via host command (SSI/SNAPI) the sequence is:
0x03 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x0F 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x32 0x32 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0xF0 0x24 0x52 0x04 0x46 0x00 0x64 0x28 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x52 0x04 0x41 0x3C 0x64 0x64 0x3B 0%
0%
(0,0) 40%
50%
70%
100%
(70,0) PDF417 Code
(40,40) Data Matrix Code
(100,40) 40%
Code 128 Code
(65,60) Code 128 Code 60%
65%
(100,100) 40%
50%
100%
Figure 5-3 Multicode Expression Example 3 User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 - 29 Multicode Mode Concatenation Parameter # F1h, CDh Enable this parameter to transmit multiple decoded bar codes, as specified by the Multicode Expression, as one bar code. Use the Multicode Concatenation Symbology parameter to specify how the concatenated bar codes transmit. Disable this to transmit decoded bar codes separately. NOTE When using Multicode Mode Concatenation, disable Transmit Code ID Character on page 5-33 and check digits. Enable Multicode Mode Concatenation
(01h)
*Disable Multicode Mode Concatenation
(00h) 5 - 30 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Multicode Concatenation Symbology Parameter # F1h, D2h Use this parameter to specify how to transmit the concatenated bar codes decoded as specified by the Multicode Expression. Multicode Mode Concatenation must be enabled to use this option. Concatenation as Code 128
(01h) Concatenation as Data Matrix
(03h)
*Concatenation as PDF417
(02h) Concatenation as Maxicode
(04h) User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 - 31 Multicode Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Multicode Expression Programming Use the following suggestions if encountering problems programming a multicode expression:
Ensure the expression is valid. Invalid expressions are rejected during programming. When an expression is rejected the previous expression remains intact. If after programming the expression the digital scanner can still decode any bar code, the expression was possibly rejected.
When programming the multicode expression via parameter bar code, the digital scanner generates beeps. If any of the following beeps do not sound during programming, an error occurred (see Table 2-1 on page 2-1 and Table 2-2 on page 2-3 for error indicators):
Scanning the Multicode Expression bar code produces a two-tone (same pitch) beep.
Scanning each value of the expression produces a two-tone (same pitch) beep.
Scanning the End Of Message bar code produces a four-tone (high-low-high-low) beep.
Check the expression for syntax errors. Try programming a simple expression to ensure the syntax is correct. See Examples of Simple Multicode Expressions.
Review Defining Multicode Expression Notes on page 5-25 for additional hints. Troubleshooting Multicode Mode Scanning and Decoding Use the following suggestions if encountering problems using multicode mode:
If the digital scanner appears to decode any single bar code instead of the intended multiple bar codes, ensure you enabled Multicode Mode on page 5-23. Programming the multicode expression does not enable multicode mode.
When specifying Region, ensure:
Coordinates are within range the 0-100 decimal (or 0x00 - 0x64 hexadecimal). Top, Left is above Bottom, Right. Top, Left is 0,0 (0x00, 0x00 hexadecimal), and Bottom, Right is 100,100
(0x64, 0x64 hexadecimal).
Regions for two or more bar codes do not overlap.
When specifying Code Type ensure the digital scanner supports the code type. Try decoding a single bar code without using multicode. If it does not decode try enabling the bar code type. See Chapter 14, Symbologies.
Experiment with simpler expressions, then add to it until you discover the source of the error. For example try the simplest expression (see Examples of Simple Multicode Expressions) and make sure you can scan a single bar code. If so, extend the expression by adding a second bar code, specifying a region, or specifying the code type. Verify that the digital scanner can decode this new expression. Continue adding to the expression until it fails to decode as expected, indicating the source of the error.
Review Defining Multicode Expression Notes on page 5-25 for additional hints.
5 - 32 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Examples of Simple Multicode Expressions The simplest multicode expression is:
One bar code of any type, anywhere in the image. To program this use: [MultiCode-Expression] 01 ; [End Of Message]
Another simple multicode expression is:
One Code 128 bar code, anywhere in the image. To program this use: [MultiCode-Expression] 01 C 02 00 08 ; [End Of Message]
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 - 33 Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters Transmit Code ID Character Parameter # 2Dh A Code ID character identifies the code type of a scanned bar code. This is useful when decoding more than one code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the Code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol. Select no Code ID character, a Symbol Code ID character, or an AIM Code ID character. For Code ID Characters, see Symbol Code Identifiers on page B-1 and AIM Code Identifiers on page B-3. NOTE If you enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character, and enable Transmit No Read Message on page 5-37, the digital scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message. Symbol Code ID Character
(02h)
*None
(00h) AIM Code ID Character
(01h) 5 - 34 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Prefix/Suffix Values Key Category Parameter # P = 63h, S1 = 62h, S2 = 64h Decimal Value Parameter # P = 69h, S1 = 68h, S2 = 6Ah You can append a prefix and/or one or two suffixes to scan data for use in data editing. To set a value for a prefix or suffix, scan a four-digit number (i.e., four bar codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes) that corresponds to that value. See Table E-1 on page E-1 for the four-digit codes. When using host commands to set the prefix or suffix, set the key category parameter to 1, then set the 3-digit decimal value. See Table E-1 on page E-1 for the four-digit codes. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. NOTE To use Prefix/Suffix values, first set the Scan Data Transmission Format on page 5-35. Scan Prefix
(07h) Scan Suffix 2
(08h) Scan Suffix 1
(06h) Data Format Cancel User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 - 35 Scan Data Transmission Format Parameter # EBh To change the scan data format, scan one of the following eight bar codes corresponding to the desired format. NOTE If using this parameter do not use ADF rules to set the prefix/suffix. To set values for the prefix and/or suffix, see Prefix/Suffix Values on page 5-34.
*Data As Is
(00h)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 2>
(02h)
<PREFIX> <DATA >
(04h)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 1>
(01h)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 1> <SUFFIX 2>
(03h) 5 - 36 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Scan Data Transmission Format (continued)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 1>
(05h)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 1> <SUFFIX 2>
(07h)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 2>
(06h) FN1 Substitution Values Key Category Parameter # 67h Decimal Value Parameter # 6Dh The Wedge and USB HID Keyboard hosts support a FN1 Substitution feature. Enabling this substitutes any FN1 character (0x1b) in an EAN128 bar code with a value. This value defaults to 7013 (Enter Key). When using host commands to set the FN1 substitution value, set the key category parameter to 1, then set the 3-digit keystroke value. See the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface for the desired value. To select a FN1 substitution value via bar code menus:
1. Scan the bar code below. Set FN1 Substitution Value 2. Locate the keystroke desired for FN1 Substitution in the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface. Enter the 4-digit ASCII Value by scanning each digit in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel. To enable FN1 substitution for USB HID keyboard, scan the Enable FN1 Substitution bar code on page -36. User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 - 37 Transmit No Read Message Parameter # 5Eh Scan a bar code below to select whether or not to transmit a No Read message. Enable this to transmit the characters NR when a successful decode does not occur before trigger release or the Decode Session Timeout expires. See Decode Session Timeout on page 5-19. Disable this to send nothing to the host if a symbol does not decode. NOTE If you enable Transmit No Read, and also enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character for Transmit Code ID Character on page 5-33, the digital scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message. Enable No Read
(01h)
*Disable No Read
(00h) 5 - 38 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter 6 USB Interface Introduction This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with a USB host. The digital scanner cradle connects directly to a USB host, or a powered USB hub. The USB host can power the cradle and recharge the digital scanner battery, but this charging method has limitations. See Using the USB Interface to Supply Power on page 1-7. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
* Indicates Default
*North American Standard USB Keyboard Feature/Option 6 - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting a USB Interface NOTE See Chapter 4, Radio Communications for information about digital scanner/cradle pairing and wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect. When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle, and a host parameter bar code is scanned, a long low/long high beep sequence sounds. Interface Cable USB Series A Connector Figure 6-1 USB Connection The digital scanner cradle connects with USB capable hosts including:
Desktop PCs and Notebooks
Apple iMac, G4, iBooks (North America only) IBM SurePOS terminals
Sun, IBM, and other network computers that support more than one keyboard. The following operating systems support the digital scanner cradle through USB:
Windows 98, 2000, ME, XP
MacOS 8.5 and above IBM 4690 OS. The digital scanner cradle also interfaces with other USB hosts which support USB Human Interface Devices
(HID). For more information on USB technology, hosts, and peripheral devices, visit www.symbol.com/usb. To connect the USB interface:
1. Attach the modular connector of the USB interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the digital scanner cradle (see Connecting the Cradle on page 1-6).
USB Interface 6 - 3 2. Plug the series A connector in the USB host or hub, or plug the Plus Power connector in an available port of the IBM SurePOS terminal. 3. Select the USB device type by scanning the appropriate bar code from USB Device Type on page 6-4. 4. On first installation when using Windows, the software prompts to select or install the Human Interface Device driver. To install this driver, provided by Windows, click Next through all the choices and click Finished on the last choice. The cradle powers up during this installation. 5. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 6-1 are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the digital scanner cradle remain the same. If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 3-2. USB Parameter Defaults Table 6-1 lists the defaults for USB host parameters. If any option needs to be changed, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 6-4. NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters. Table 6-1 USB Host Default Table Parameter USB Host Parameters USB Device Type Default Page Number HID Keyboard Emulation 6-4 USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) North American USB Keystroke Delay USB CAPS Lock Override USB Ignore Unknown Characters Emulate Keypad USB FN1 Substitution Function Key Mapping Simulated Caps Lock Convert Case Ignore Beep Ignore Bar Code Configuration No Delay Disable Send Disable Disable Disable Disable No Case Conversion Disable Disable 6-5 6-7 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-9 6-9 6-10 6-10 6-11 6-11 6 - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide USB Host Parameters USB Device Type Select the desired USB device type. NOTE When changing USB Device Types, the digital scanner automatically restarts. The digital scanner issues the standard startup beep sequences.
*HID Keyboard Emulation IBM Hand-Held USB IBM Table Top USB USB OPOS Handheld USB Interface 6 - 5 USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type. This setting applies only to the USB HID Keyboard Emulation device. NOTE When changing USB country keyboard types the digital scanner automatically resets. The digital scanner issues the standard startup beep sequences.
*North American Standard USB Keyboard French Windows French Canadian Windows 2000/XP German Windows French Canadian Windows 95/98 Spanish Windows 6 - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes continued) Italian Windows UK English Windows Portuguese-Brazilian Windows Swedish Windows Japanese Windows (ASCII) USB Keystroke Delay This parameter sets the delay, in milliseconds, between emulated keystrokes. Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when hosts require a slower transmission of data. USB Interface 6 - 7
*No Delay Medium Delay (20 msec) Long Delay (40 msec) USB CAPS Lock Override This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device. When enabled, the case of the data is preserved regardless of the state of the caps lock key. This setting is always enabled for the Japanese, Windows (ASCII) keyboard type and can not be disabled. Override Caps Lock Key
(Enable)
*Do Not Override Caps Lock Key
(Disable) 6 - 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide USB Ignore Unknown Characters This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device and IBM device. Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character, then the digital scanner issues an error beep.
*Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Emulate Keypad When enabled, all characters are sent as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad. For example ASCII A would be sent as ALT make 0 6 5 ALT Break.
*Disable Keypad Emulation Enable Keypad Emulation USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution This option applies only to the USB HID Keyboard Emulation device. When enabled, this allows replacement of any FN 1 characters in an EAN 128 bar code with a Key Category and value chosen by the user (see FN1 Substitution Values on page 5-36 to set the Key Category and Key Value). USB Interface 6 - 9 Enable FN1 Substitution
*Disable FN1 Substitution Function Key Mapping ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as a control-key sequences (see Table 6-2 on page 6-12). When this parameter is enabled, the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled.
*Disable Function Key Mapping Enable Function Key Mapping 6 - 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Simulated Caps Lock When enabled, the digital scanner inverts upper and lower case characters on the digital scanner bar code as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard. This inversion is done regardless of the current state of the keyboards Caps Lock state.
*Disable Simulated Caps Lock Convert Case When enabled, the digital scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case. Enable Simulated Caps Lock
*No Case Conversion Convert All to Lower Case Convert All to Upper Case USB Interface 6 - 11 Optional USB Parameters If you configure the digital scanner and find the settings were not saved, or changed, when the system is restarted scan the bar codes that follow to override USB interface defaults. Scan a bar code below after setting defaults and before configuring the digital scanner. Ignore Beep The host can send a beep request to the digital scanner. When this parameter is enabled, the request is not sent to the attached digital scanner. All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if it were processed.
*Disable Ignore Bar Code Configuration The host has the ability to enable/disable code types. When this parameter is enabled, the request is not sent to the attached digital scanner. All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if it were processed. Enable
*Disable Enable 6 - 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide ASCII Character Set for USB Table 6-2 ASCII Character Set for USB Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Value 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023
%U
$A
$B
$C
$D
$E
$F
$G
$H
$I
$J
$K
$L
$M
$N
$O
$P
$Q
$R
$S
$T
$U
$V
$W Keystroke CTRL 2 CTRL A CTRL B CTRL C CTRL D CTRL E CTRL F CTRL G CTRL H/BACKSPACE1 CTRL I/HORIZONTAL TAB1 CTRL J CTRL K CTRL L CTRL M/ENTER1 CTRL N CTRL O CTRL P CTRL Q CTRL R CTRL S CTRL T CTRL U CTRL V CTRL W 1024 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent. CTRL X
$X Table 6-2 ASCII Character Set for USB (Continued) USB Interface 6 - 13 ASCII Value 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character
$Y
$Z
%A
%B
%C
%D
%E Space
/A
/B
/C
/D
/E
/F
/G
/H
/I
/J
/K
/L
-
.
/O 0 1 2 3 Keystroke CTRL Y CTRL Z CTRL [/ESC1 CTRL \
CTRL ]
CTRL 6 CTRL -
Space
!
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
0 1 2 3 1052 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent. 4 4 6 - 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 6-2 ASCII Character Set for USB (Continued) Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Value 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 5 6 7 8 9
/Z
%F
%G
%H
%I
%J
%V A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O Keystroke 5 6 7 8 9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O 1080 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent. P P USB Interface 6 - 15 Keystroke Table 6-2 ASCII Character Set for USB (Continued) ASCII Value 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Q R S T U V W X Y Z
%K
%L
%M
%N
%O
%W
+A
+B
+C
+D
+E
+F
+G
+H
+I
+J
+K Q R S T U V W X Y Z
[
\
]
^
_
`
a b c d e f g h i j k 1108 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
+L l 6 - 16 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 6-2 ASCII Character Set for USB (Continued) Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Value 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125
+M
+N
+O
+P
+Q
+R
+S
+T
+U
+V
+W
+X
+Y
+Z
%P
%Q
%R Keystroke m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
{
|
}
1126 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
%S
~
USB Interface 6 - 17 Table 6-3 USB ALT Key Character Set ALT Keys Keystroke 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 ALT 2 ALT A ALT B ALT C ALT D ALT E ALT F ALT G ALT H ALT I ALT J ALT K ALT L ALT M ALT N ALT O ALT P ALT Q ALT R ALT S ALT T ALT U ALT V ALT W ALT X ALT Y ALT Z 6 - 18 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 6-4 USB GUI Key Character Set 3000 3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 3071 3072 3073 3074 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 3080 GUI Key Keystroke Right Control Key GUI 0 GUI 1 GUI 2 GUI 3 GUI 4 GUI 5 GUI 6 GUI 7 GUI 8 GUI 9 GUI A GUI B GUI C GUI D GUI E GUI F GUI G GUI H GUI I GUI J GUI K GUI L GUI M GUI N GUI O GUI P Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key. Table 6-4 USB GUI Key Character Set (Continued) GUI Key Keystroke USB Interface 6 - 19 3081 3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 3088 3089 3090 GUI Q GUI R GUI S GUI T GUI U GUI V GUI W GUI X GUI Y GUI Z Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key. Table 6-5 USB F Key Character Set F Keys Keystroke 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 6 - 20 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 6-5 USB F Key Character Set (Continued) F Keys Keystroke 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 5024 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 Table 6-6 USB Numeric Keypad Character Set Numeric Keypad Keystroke 6042 6043 6044 6045 6046 6047 6048 6049 6050 6051 6052 6053 6054 6055 6056 6057 6058 6059
*
+
undefined
-
.
/
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Enter Num Lock Table 6-7 USB Extended Keypad Character Set Extended Keypad Keystroke USB Interface 6 - 21 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 7006 7007 7008 7009 7010 7011 7012 7013 7014 7015 7016 7017 7018 Break Delete PgUp End Pg Dn Pause Scroll Lock Backspace Tab Print Screen Insert Home Enter Escape Up Arrow Down Arrow Left Arrow Right Arrow 6 - 22 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter 7 RS-232 Interface Introduction This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with an RS-232 host interface. The RS-232 interface is used to attach the scanner cradle to point-of-sale devices, host computers, or other devices with an available RS-232 port (i.e., COM port). If the particular host is not listed in Table 7-2, set the communication parameters to match the host device. Refer to the documentation for the host device. NOTE This digital scanner uses TTL RS-232 signal levels, which interface with most system architectures. For system architectures requiring RS-232C signal levels, Motorola offers different cables providing the TTL to RS-232C conversion. Contact Motorola Enterprise Mobility Support for more information. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
* Indicates Default
*Baud Rate 38,400 Feature/Option 7 - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting an RS-232 Interface NOTE See Chapter 4, Radio Communications for information about digital scanner/cradle pairing and wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect. When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle, and a host parameter bar code is scanned, a long low/long high beep sequence sounds. This connection is made directly from the cradle to the host computer. Serial Port Connection to Host Interface Cable Power Supply Figure 7-1 RS-232 Direct Connection To connect the RS-232 interface:
1. Attach the modular connector of the RS-232 interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the scanner cradle (see Connecting the Cradle on page 1-6). 2. Connect the other end of the RS-232 interface cable to the serial port on the host. 3. Connect the power supply to the serial connector end of the RS-232 interface cable. Plug the power supply into an appropriate outlet. 4. Select the RS-232 host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from RS-232 Host Types on page 7-6. 5. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 7-1 are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same. If a power supply is used, disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host. RS-232 Interface 7 - 3 RS-232 Parameter Defaults Table 7-1 lists the defaults for RS-232 host parameters. If any option needs to be changed, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 7-4. NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters. Table 7-1 RS-232 Host Default Table Parameter Default Page Number RS-232 Host Parameters RS-232 Host Types Baud Rate Parity Type Stop Bit Select Data Bits (ASCII Format) Check Receive Errors Hardware Handshaking Software Handshaking Host Serial Response Time-out RTS Line State Beep on <BEL>
Intercharacter Delay Nixdorf Beep/LED Options Ignore Unknown Characters Standard 9600 None 1 Stop Bit 8-Bit Enable None None 2 sec Low RTS Disable 0 msec Normal Operation Send Bar Code 7-6 7-8 7-9 7-9 7-10 7-11 7-11 7-13 7-15 7-16 7-16 7-17 7-18 7-18 7 - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide RS-232 Host Parameters Various RS-232 hosts are set up with their own parameter default settings (Table 7-2). Selecting the ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, Olivetti, Omron, or terminal sets the defaults listed below. Table 7-2 Terminal Specific RS-232 Parameter ICL Fujitsu Wincor-
Nixdorf Mode A Wincor-
Nixdorf Mode B/OPOS/JPOS Olivetti Omron CUTE Transmit Code ID Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Data Transmission Format Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Prefix/Data/
Suffix Data/Suffix Suffix CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013) ETX (1002) CR (1013) Baud Rate Parity Hardware Handshaking Software Handshaking Serial Response Time-out Stop Bit Select ASCII Format 9600 Even RTS/CTS Option 3 9600 None None 9600 Odd 9600 Odd RTS/CTS Option 3 RTS/CTS Option 3 9600 Even None 9600 None None None None None None ACK/NAK None None 9.9 Sec. 2 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec. One 8-Bit One 8-Bit One 8-Bit One 8-Bit One 7-Bit One 8-Bit One 7-Bit Beep On <BEL>
Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable RTS Line State High Low Low Low = No data to send Low High High Prefix None None None None STX (1003) None STX (1003) In the Nixdorf Mode B, if CTS is low, scanning is disabled. When CTS is high, scanning is enabled. If you scan Nixdorf Mode B without connecting the digital scanner to the proper host, it may appear unable to scan. If this happens, scan a different RS-232 host type within 5 seconds of cycling power to the digital scanner. The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select CUTE, scan *Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning (01h) on page 5-5, then change the host selection. Prefix/Data/
Suffix CR (1013) ETX (1002) 9600 Even None RS-232 Interface 7 - 5 RS-232 Host Parameters (continued) Selecting the ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS terminal enables the transmission of code ID characters listed in Table 7-3 below. These code ID characters are not programmable and are separate from the Transmit Code ID feature. The Transmit Code ID feature should not be enabled for these terminals. Table 7-3 Terminal Specific Code ID Characters Code Type ICL Fujitsu Wincor-
Nixdorf Mode A Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B/
OPOS/JPOS UPC-A UPC-E EAN-8/JAN-8 EAN-13/JAN-13 A E FF F A E FF F Code 39 C <len>
None Code 39 Full ASCII None None Codabar Code 128 I 2 of 5 Code 93 D 2 of 5 GS1-128 MSI N <len>
None L <len>
I <len>
None None None None H <len>
None L <len>
None Bookland EAN F Trioptic Code 11 IATA Code 32 GS1 Databar Variants PDF417 Datamatrix QR Codes None None H<len>
None None None None None Aztec/Aztec Rune None None None F None None None None None None None None None A C B A M M N K I L H P O A None None H None E Q None None None A C B A M M N K I L H P O A None None H None E Q None None None Olivetti Omron CUTE A C B A A E FF F M <len>
C <len>
None None A None None A 3 3 N <len>
N <len>
None K <len>
L <len>
I <len>
I <len>
5 1 L <len>
None None H <len>
H <len>
P <len>
L <len>
2 5 O <len>
None A None None None None None None None None None F None None None None None None None None None None None None None 2 None None 6 4 7 8 7 - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide RS-232 Host Types To select an RS-232 host interface, scan one of the following bar codes.
*Standard RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A Olivetti ORS4500 ICL RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode B RS-232 Interface 7 - 7 Omron Fujitsu RS-232 OPOS/JPOS SITA/CUTE 7 - 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Baud Rate Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Set the digital scanner's baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host device or may reach it in distorted form. Baud Rate 600 Baud Rate 2400
*Baud Rate 9600 Baud Rate 38,400 Baud Rate 1200 Baud Rate 4800 Baud Rate 19,200 RS-232 Interface 7 - 9 Parity A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Select the parity type according to host device requirements.
Select Odd parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an odd number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character.
Select Even parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an even number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character.
Select Mark parity and the parity bit is always 1.
Select Space parity and the parity bit is always 0.
Select None when no parity bit is required. Odd Mark Even Space
*None Stop Bit Select The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. The number of stop bits selected 7 - 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide
(one or two) depends on the number the receiving terminal is programmed to accommodate. Set the number of stop bits to match host device requirements.
*1 Stop Bit Data Bits (ASCII Format) This parameter allows the digital scanner to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit ASCII protocol. 2 Stop Bits 7-Bit
*8-Bit Check Receive Errors Select whether or not the parity, framing, and overrun of received characters are checked. The parity value of received characters is verified against the parity parameter selected above. RS-232 Interface 7 - 11
*Check For Received Errors
(Enable) Do Not Check For Received Errors
(Disable) Hardware Handshaking The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without the hardware handshaking lines, Request to Send (RTS), and Clear to Send (CTS). If Standard RTS/CTS handshaking is not selected, scan data is transmitted as it becomes available. If Standard RTS/CTS handshaking is selected, scan data is transmitted according to the following sequence:
The digital scanner reads the CTS line for activity. If CTS is asserted, the digital scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out for the host to de-assert the CTS line. If, after Host Serial Response Time-out, the CTS line is still asserted, the digital scanner sounds a transmit error, and any scanned data is lost.
When the CTS line is de-asserted, the digital scanner asserts the RTS line and waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out for the host to assert CTS. When the host asserts CTS, data is transmitted. If, after Host Serial Response Time-out, the CTS line is not asserted, the digital scanner sounds a transmit error, and discards the data.
When data transmission is complete, the digital scanner de-asserts RTS 10 msec after sending the last character. The host should respond by negating CTS. The digital scanner checks for a de-asserted CTS upon the next transmission of data. During the transmission of data, the CTS line should be asserted. If CTS is de-asserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the transmission is aborted, the digital scanner sounds a transmission error, and the data is discarded. If the above communication sequence fails, the digital scanner issues an error indication. In this case, the data is lost and must be rescanned. If Hardware Handshaking and Software Handshaking are both enabled, Hardware Handshaking takes precedence. NOTE The DTR signal is jumpered to the active state.
7 - 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Hardware Handshaking (continued)
None: Scan the bar code below if no Hardware Handshaking is desired.
Standard RTS/CTS: Scan the bar code below to select Standard RTS/CTS Hardware Handshaking.
RTS/CTS Option 1: When RTS/CTS Option 1 is selected, the digital scanner asserts RTS before transmitting and ignores the state of CTS. The digital scanner de-asserts RTS when the transmission is complete.
RTS/CTS Option 2: When Option 2 is selected, RTS is always high or low (user-programmed logic level). However, the digital scanner waits for CTS to be asserted before transmitting data. If CTS is not asserted within Host Serial Response Time-out, the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data.
RTS/CTS Option 3: When Option 3 is selected, the digital scanner asserts RTS prior to any data transmission, regardless of the state of CTS. The digital scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out for CTS to be asserted. If CTS is not asserted during this time, the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data. The digital scanner de-asserts RTS when transmission is complete.
*None RTS/CTS Option 1 RTS/CTS Option 3 Standard RTS/CTS RTS/CTS Option 2 RS-232 Interface 7 - 13 Software Handshaking This parameter offers control of the data transmission process in addition to, or instead of, that offered by hardware handshaking. There are five options. If Software Handshaking and Hardware Handshaking are both enabled, Hardware Handshaking takes precedence.
None: When this option is selected, data is transmitted immediately. No response is expected from host.
ACK/NAK: When this option is selected, after transmitting data, the digital scanner expects either an ACK or NAK response from the host. When a NAK is received, the digital scanner transmits the same data again and waits for either an ACK or NAK. After three unsuccessful attempts to send data when NAKs are received, the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data. The digital scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Time-out to receive an ACK or NAK. If the digital scanner does not get a response in this time, it issues an error indication and discards the data. There are no retries when a time-out occurs.
ENQ: When this option is selected, the digital scanner waits for an ENQ character from the host before transmitting data. If an ENQ is not received within the Host Serial Response Time-out, the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data. The host must transmit an ENQ character at least every Host Serial Response Time-out to prevent transmission errors.
ACK/NAK with ENQ: This combines the two previous options. For re-transmissions of data, due to a NAK from the host, an additional ENQ is not required.
XON/XOFF: An XOFF character turns the digital scanner transmission off until the digital scanner receives an XON character. There are two situations for XON/XOFF:
XOFF is received before the digital scanner has data to send. When the digital scanner has data to send, it waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out for an XON character before transmission. If the XON is not received within this time, the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data.
XOFF is received during a transmission. Data transmission then stops after sending the current byte. When the digital scanner receives an XON character, it sends the rest of the data message. The digital scanner waits up to 30 seconds for the XON. 7 - 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Software Handshaking (continued)
*None ENQ XON/XOFF ACK/NAK ACK/NAK with ENQ Host Serial Response Time-out This parameter specifies how long the digital scanner waits for an ACK, NAK, ENQ, XON, or CTS before determining that a transmission error occurred. RS-232 Interface 7 - 15
*Minimum: 2 sec Medium: 5 sec Maximum: 9.9 sec Low: 2.5 sec High: 7.5 sec 7 - 16 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide RTS Line State This parameter sets the idle state of the Serial Host RTS line. Scan a bar code below to select Low RTS or High RTS line state.
*Host: Low RTS Beep on <BEL>
Point-to-Point Mode Only Host: High RTS When this parameter is enabled, the digital scanner issues a beep when a <BEL> character is detected on the RS-232 serial line. <BEL> is issued to gain a user's attention to an illegal entry or other important event. NOTE This parameter is not supported in Multipoint-to-Point mode. Beep On <BEL> Character
(Enable)
*Do Not Beep On <BEL> Character
(Disable) Intercharacter Delay This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay inserted between character transmissions. RS-232 Interface 7 - 17
*Minimum: 0 msec Medium: 50 msec Maximum: 99 msec Low: 25 msec High: 75 msec 7 - 18 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Nixdorf Beep/LED Options When Nixdorf Mode B is selected, this indicates when the digital scanner should beep and turn on its LED after a decode.
*Normal Operation
(Beep/LED immediately after decode) Beep/LED After Transmission Beep/LED After CTS Pulse Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound on the digital scanner. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character and then an error beep sounds on the digital scanner.
*Send Bar Code with Unknown Characters Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters RS-232 Interface 7 - 19 ASCII Character Set for RS-232 The values in Table 7-4 can be assigned as prefixes or suffixes for ASCII character data transmission. Table 7-4 ASCII Character Set for RS-232 ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026
%U
$A
$B
$C
$D
$E
$F
$G
$H
$I
$J
$K
$L
$M
$N
$O
$P
$Q
$R
$S
$T
$U
$V
$W
$X
$Y
$Z NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BELL BCKSPC HORIZ TAB LF/NW LN VT FF CR/ENTER SO SI DLE DC1/XON DC2 DC3/XOFF DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB 7 - 20 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 7-4 ASCII Character Set for RS-232 (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1057 1056
%A
%B
%C
%D
%E Space
/A
/B
/C
/D
/E
/F
/G
/H
/I
/J
/K
/L
-
.
/O 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ESC FS GS RS US Space
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Table 7-4 ASCII Character Set for RS-232 (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character RS-232 Interface 7 - 21 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 9
/Z
%F
%G
%H
%I
%J
%V A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V 9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V 7 - 22 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 7-4 ASCII Character Set for RS-232 (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 W X Y Z
%K
%L
%M
%N
%O
%W
+A
+B
+C
+D
+E
+F
+G
+H
+I
+J
+K
+L
+M
+N
+O
+P
+Q
+R
+S
+T W X Y Z
[
\
]
^
_
`
a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t Table 7-4 ASCII Character Set for RS-232 (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character RS-232 Interface 7 - 23
+U
+V
+W
+X
+Y
+Z
%P
%Q
%R
%S 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 7013 u v w x y z
{
|
}
~
Undefined ENTER 7 - 24 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter 8 Keyboard Wedge Interface Introduction This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle for keyboard wedge host interface, used to connect the cradle between the keyboard and host computer. The digital scanner translates the bar code data into keystrokes, and transmits the information to the host computer via the cradle interface. The host computer accepts the keystrokes as if they originated from the keyboard. This interface adds bar code reading functionality to a system designed for manual keyboard input. In this mode the keyboard keystrokes are simply passed through. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
* Indicates Default
*North American Feature/Option 8 - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface NOTE See Chapter 4, Radio Communications for information about digital scanner/cradle pairing and wireless communication. The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect. When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle, and a host parameter bar code is scanned, a long low/long high beep sequence sounds. Male DIN Connector Keyboard Connector Female DIN Keyboard Y-cable Connector Figure 8-1 Keyboard Wedge Connection with Y-cable To connect the Keyboard Wedge interface Y-cable:
1. Turn off the host and unplug the keyboard connector. 2. Attach the modular connector of the Y-cable to the host port on the bottom of the digital scanner cradle. See Connecting the Cradle on page 1-6. 3. Connect the round male DIN host connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard port on the host device. 4. Connect the round female DIN keyboard connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard connector. 5. If needed, attach the optional power supply to the connector in the middle of the Y-cable. 6. Ensure that all connections are secure. 7. Turn on the host system. 8. Select the Keyboard Wedge host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters on page 8-4. 9. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. Keyboard Wedge Interface 8 - 3 NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 8-1 are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same. If a power supply is used, disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host. Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults Table 8-1 lists the defaults for Keyboard Wedge host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) in the Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters section beginning on page 8-4. NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters. Table 8-1 Keyboard Wedge Host Default Table Parameter Default Page Number Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters Keyboard Wedge Host Type IBM PC/AT& IBM PC Compatibles1 Country Types (Country Codes) North American Ignore Unknown Characters Keystroke Delay Intra-Keystroke Delay Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation Caps Lock On Caps Lock Override Convert Wedge Data Function Key Mapping FN1 Substitution Send No Delay Disable Disable Disable Disable No Convert Disable Disable 8-4 8-5 8-6 8-7 8-7 8-8 8-8 8-9 8-9 8-10 8-10 Send and Make Break 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Send 8-11 8 - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters Keyboard Wedge Host Types Select the Keyboard Wedge host by scanning one of the bar codes below. IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles1 IBM AT Notebook NOTE 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Keyboard Wedge Interface 8 - 5 Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes) Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type. If the keyboard type is not listed, see Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 8-8.
*North American French Windows French Canadian Windows XP/2000 Italian Windows German Windows French Canadian Windows 95/98 Spanish Windows 8 - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes continued) Swedish Windows Japanese Windows UK English Windows Portuguese-Brazilian Windows Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound on the digital scanner. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character, then the digital scanner issues an error beep.
*Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Keyboard Wedge Interface 8 - 7 Keystroke Delay This is the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes. Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when hosts require a slower transmission of data.
*No Delay Medium Delay (20 msec) Long Delay (40 msec) Intra-Keystroke Delay When enabled, an additional delay is inserted between each emulated key depression and release. This sets the Keystroke Delay parameter to a minimum of 5 msec as well. Enable Intra-Keystroke Delay
*Disable Intra-Keystroke Delay 8 - 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation This allows emulation of most other country keyboard types not listed in Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes) on page 8-5 in a Microsoft operating system environment. Enable Alternate Numeric Keypad
*Disable Alternate Numeric Keypad Caps Lock On When enabled, the digital scanner emulates keystrokes as if the Caps Lock key is always pressed. Note that if both Caps Lock On and Caps Lock Override are enabled, Caps Lock Override takes precedence Enable Caps Lock On
*Disable Caps Lock On Keyboard Wedge Interface 8 - 9 Caps Lock Override When enabled, on AT or AT Notebook hosts, the keyboard ignores the state of the Caps Lock key. Therefore, an A in the bar code is sent as an A no matter what the state of the keyboards Caps Lock key. Note that if both Caps Lock On and Caps Lock Override are enabled, Caps Lock Override takes precedence. Enable Caps Lock Override Convert Wedge Data When enabled, the digital scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case.
*Disable Caps Lock Override Convert to Upper Case
*No Convert Convert to Lower Case 8 - 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Function Key Mapping ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences (see Table 8-2 on page 8-13). When this parameter is enabled, the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled. Enable Function Key Mapping
*Disable Function Key Mapping FN1 Substitution When enabled, the digital scanner replaces FN1 characters in an EAN128 bar code with a keystroke chosen by the user (see FN1 Substitution Values on page 5-36). Enable FN1 Substitution
*Disable FN1 Substitution Send Make and Break When enabled, the scan codes for releasing a key are not sent.
*Send Make and Break Scan Codes Keyboard Wedge Interface 8 - 11 Send Make Scan Code Only 8 - 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Maps Refer to the following keyboard map for prefix/suffix keystroke parameters. To program the prefix/suffix values, see the bar codes on page 5-34. 7014 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 7010 7007 7006 7001 7009 Figure 8-2 IBM PS2 Type Keyboard 7008 7011 7012 7003 7002 7004 7005 7013 7013 7015 7017 7016 7018 Keyboard Wedge Interface 8 - 13 ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge NOTE Code 39 Full ASCII interprets the bar code special character ($ + % /) preceding a Code 39 character and assigns an ASCII character value to the pair. For example, when Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled and a +B is scanned, it is interpreted as b, %J as ?, and %V as @. Scanning ABC%I outputs the keystroke equivalent of ABC >.. Table 8-2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020
$A
$B
$C
$D
$E
$F
$G
$H
$I
$J
$K
$L
$M
$N
$O
$P
$Q
$R
$S
$T CTRL A CTRL B CTRL C CTRL D CTRL E CTRL F CTRL G CTRL H/BACKSPACE1 CTRL I/HORIZONTAL TAB1 CTRL J CTRL K CTRL L CTRL M/ENTER1 CTRL N CTRL O CTRL P CTRL Q CTRL R CTRL S CTRL T 1021 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent. CTRL U
$U 8 - 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 8-2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048
$V
$W
$X
$Y
$Z
%A
%B
%C
%D
%E Space
/A
/B
/C
/D
/E
/F
/G
/H
/I
/J
/K
/L
-
.
/O 0 CTRL V CTRL W CTRL X CTRL Y CTRL Z CTRL [ /ESC1 CTRL \
CTRL ]
CTRL 6 CTRL -
Space
!
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
0 1049 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent. 1 1 Keyboard Wedge Interface 8 - 15 Table 8-2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/Z
%F
%G
%H
%I
%J
%V A B C D E F G H I J K L 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
A B C D E F G H I J K L 1077 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent. M M 8 - 16 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 8-2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
%K
%L
%M
%N
%O
%W
+A
+B
+C
+D
+E
+F
+G
+H N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
[
\
]
^
_ a b c d e f g h 1105 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
+I i Keyboard Wedge Interface 8 - 17 Table 8-2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125
+J
+K
+L
+M
+N
+O
+P
+Q
+R
+S
+T
+U
+V
+W
+X
+Y
+Z
%P
%Q
%R j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
{
|
}
1126 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
%S
~
Table 8-3 Keyboard Wedge ALT Key Character Set ALT Keys Keystroke 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 ALT A ALT B ALT C ALT D ALT E 8 - 18 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 8-3 Keyboard Wedge ALT Key Character Set (Continued) ALT Keys Keystroke 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 ALT F ALT G ALT H ALT I ALT J ALT K ALT L ALT M ALT N ALT O ALT P ALT Q ALT R ALT S ALT T ALT U ALT V ALT W ALT X ALT Y ALT Z Table 8-4 Keyboard Wedge GIU Key Character Set 3000 3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 GUI Keys Keystrokes Right Control Key GUI 0 GUI 1 GUI 2 GUI 3 GUI 4 GUI 5 Keyboard Wedge Interface 8 - 19 Table 8-4 Keyboard Wedge GIU Key Character Set (Continued) GUI Keys Keystrokes 3054 3055 3056 3057 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 3071 3072 3073 3074 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 3088 3089 3090 GUI 6 GUI 7 GUI 8 GUI 9 GUI A GUI B GUI C GUI D GUI E GUI F GUI G GUI H GUI I GUI J GUI K GUI L GUI M GUI N GUI O GUI P GUI Q GUI R GUI S GUI T GUI U GUI V GUI W GUI X GUI Y GUI Z 8 - 20 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 8-5 Keyboard Wedge F Key Character Set F Keys Keystroke 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 5024 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 Keyboard Wedge Interface 8 - 21 Table 8-6 Keyboard Wedge Numeric Keypad Character Set Numeric Keypad Keystroke 6042 6043 6044 6045 6046 6047 6048 6049 6050 6051 6052 6053 6054 6055 6056 6057 6058 6059
*
+
undefined
-
.
/
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Enter Num Lock 8 - 22 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 8-7 Keyboard Wedge Extended Keypad Character Set Extended Keypad Keystroke 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 7006 7007 7008 7009 7010 7011 7012 7013 7014 7015 7016 7017 7018 Break Delete Pg Up End Pg Dn Pause Scroll Lock Backspace Tab Print Screen Insert Home Enter Escape Up Arrow Dn Arrow Left Arrow Right Arrow
| 1 2 | User Manual II | Users Manual | 4.75 MiB | January 03 2010 |
Chapter 9 IBM Interface Introduction This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with an IBM 468X/469X host computer. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
* Indicates Default
*Disable Convert to Code 39 Feature/Option 9 - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting to an IBM 468X/469X Host NOTE See Chapter 4, Radio Communications for information about digital scanner/cradle pairing and wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect. When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle, and a host parameter bar code is scanned, a long low/long high beep sequence sounds. This connection is made directly from the cradle to the host interface. Interface Cable Host Port Connector Figure 9-1 IBM Direct Connection To connect the IBM 46XX interface:
1. Attach the modular connector of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the digital scanner cradle (see Connecting the Cables to the Cradle on page 1-6). 2. Connect the other end of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the appropriate port on the host (typically Port 9). 3. Select the port address by scanning the appropriate bar code from Port Address on page 9-4. 4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 9-1 are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same. If a power supply is used, disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host. The only required configuration is the port number. Other digital scanner parameters are typically controlled by the IBM system. IBM Interface 9 - 3 IBM Parameter Defaults Table 9-1 lists the defaults for IBM host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 9-4. NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters. Table 9-1 IBM Host Default Table Parameter Default Page Number IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters Port Address None Selected Convert Unknown to Code 39 Ignore Beep Ignore Bar Code Configuration Disable Disable Disable 9-4 9-5 9-5 9-6 9 - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters Port Address This parameter sets the IBM 468X/469X port used. NOTE Scanning one of these bar codes enables the RS-485 interface on the digital scanner.
* None Selected Non-IBM Scanner Emulation (Port 5B) Hand-held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B)1 Table-top Scanner Emulation (Port 17) NOTE 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Convert Unknown to Code 39 Scan a bar code below to enable or disable the conversion of unknown bar code type data to Code 39. IBM Interface 9 - 5 Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39
*Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39 Optional IBM Parameters If you configure the digital scanner and find the settings were not saved, or changed, when the system is restarted scan the bar codes that follow to override IBM interface defaults. Scan a bar code below after setting defaults and before configuring the digital scanner. Ignore Beep The host can send a beep request to the digital scanner. When this parameter is enabled, the request is not sent to the attached digital scanner. All directives are still acknowledged to the IBM RS485 host as if it were processed.
*Disable Enable 9 - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Ignore Bar Code Configuration The host has the ability to enable/disable code types. When this parameter is enabled, the request is not sent to the attached digital scanner. All directives are still acknowledged to the IBM RS485 host as if it were processed.
*Disable Enable Chapter 10 Wand Emulation Interface Introduction This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with a wand emulation host. This mode is used whenever wand emulation communication is needed. The digital scanner cradle connects either to an external wand decoder or to a decoder integrated in a portable terminal or Point-of-Sale (POS) terminal. In this mode the digital scanner emulates the signal of a digital wand to make it readable by a wand decoder. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
* Indicates Default
*Transmit Unknown Characters Feature/Option 10 - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting Using Wand Emulation NOTE See Chapter 4, Radio Communications for information about digital scanner/cradle pairing and wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect. When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle, and a host parameter bar code is scanned, a long low/long high beep sequence sounds. To perform Wand Emulation, connect the cradle to a portable data terminal, or a controller which collects the wand data and interprets it for the host. Wand Port Interface Cable Mobile Computer Figure 10-1 Wand Emulation Connection To connect the Wand Emulation interface:
1. Attach the modular connector of the Wand Emulation interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the digital scanner cradle (see Connecting the Cradle on page 1-6). 2. Connect the other end of the Wand Emulation interface cable to the wand port on the mobile computer or controller. 3. Select the Wand Emulation host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from Wand Emulation Host Types on page 10-4. 4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 10-1 are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same. If a power supply is used, disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host. CAUTION Connect the cradle to a 5 volt decoder only. Connecting the cradle to a 12 volt decoder can damage the digital scanner and invalidate the warranty. Wand Emulation Interface 10 - 3 Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults Table 10-1 lists the defaults for Wand Emulation host types. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in Wand Emulation Host Parameters beginning on page 10-4. NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters. Table 10-1 Wand Emulation Default Table Parameter Default Wand Emulation Host Parameters Wand Emulation Host Types Leading Margin Polarity Symbol OmniLink Interface Controller1 80 msec Bar High/Margin Low Ignore Unknown Characters Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Send Disable Page Number 10-4 10-5 10-6 10-6 10-7 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Disable 10-8 10 - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Wand Emulation Host Parameters Wand Emulation Host Types Select a Wand Emulation host by scanning one of the bar codes below. Symbol OmniLink Interface Controller1 Symbol PDT Terminal (MSI) Symbol PTC Terminal (Telxon) NOTE 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Wand Emulation Interface 10 - 5 Leading Margin (Quiet Zone) Scan a bar code below to select a leading margin duration. A leading margin is the time that precedes the first bar of the scan, (in milliseconds). The minimum allowed value is 80 msec and the maximum is 250 msec. This parameter accommodates older wand decoders which cannot handle short leading margins. NOTE 250 msec is the maximum value that this parameter can attain, however, 200 msec is sufficient.
*80 msec 200 msec 140 msec 10 - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Polarity Scan a bar code below to select the polarity required by the decoder. Polarity determines how the cradle's Wand Emulation interface creates the Digitized Bar code Pattern (DBP). DBP is a digital signal that represents the scanned bar code. Different decoders expect the DBP to be in a certain format. The DBP either has the "highs"
represent bars and the "lows" represent spaces (margins), or the "highs" represent spaces (margins) and the
"lows" represent bars.
*Bar High/Margin Low Bar Low/Margin High Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound on the digital scanner. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, bar codes containing at least one unknown character are not sent to the host, and the digital scanner emits an error beep.
*Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters Wand Emulation Interface 10 - 7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 By default, the Wand Emulation interface sends data to the attached host in the same symbology that was decoded. This can be a problem for customers with older systems that do not recognize newer symbologies (for example, GS1 DataBar). Enabling this parameter ignores the original symbology decoded, and outputs the data as if it were a Code 39 bar code. Any lowercase characters in the original data stream are transmitted as uppercase characters. This also allows ADF rules. If Ignore Unknown Characters is enabled, any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced by a space. If Ignore Unknown Characters is disabled, if any characters that do not have a corresponding character are encountered, the digital scanner emits an error beep and no data is transmitted. NOTE ADF Note: By default, the Wand Emulation interface does not allow scanned data to be processed by ADF rules. Enabling this parameter has the side effect of allowing the scanned data to be processed by the ADF rules (see Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting). Enable Convert to Code 39 for Wand Host
*Disable Convert to Code 39 for Wand Host 10 - 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII By default, any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced by a space. If this parameter is enabled, the data sent to the wand interface is encoded in Code 39 Full ASCII. This setting requires that the host be able to interpret Code 39 Full ASCII data. This setting applies only if Convert to Code 39 is also enabled.
*Disable Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Enable Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Chapter 11 Scanner Emulation Interface This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with a digital scanner emulation host. With digital scanner emulation, the cradle connects either to an external decoder or to a decoder integrated in a portable terminal or Point-of-Sale (POS) terminal. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
* Indicates Default
*Parameter Process and Pass-Through Feature/Option 11 - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting Using Scanner Emulation NOTE See Chapter 4, Radio Communications for information about scanner/cradle pairing and wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect. When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle, and a host parameter bar code is scanned, a long low/long high beep sequence sounds. To perform Scanner Emulation, connect the cradle to a mobile computer, or a controller which collects the data and interprets it for the host. Host Port Connector Interface Cable Figure 11-1 Scanner Emulation Connection To connect the Scanner Emulation interface:
1. Attach the modular connector of the Scanner Emulation interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the digital scanner cradle (see Connecting the Cables to the Cradle on page 1-6). 2. Connect the other end of the Scanner Emulation interface cable to the digital scanner port on the mobile computer or controller. 3. Scan the Scanner Emulation host bar code from Scanner Emulation Host on page 11-3 to enable the Scanner Emulation host interface. 4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 11-1 are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same. If a power supply is used, disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host. CAUTION Connect the cradle to a 5 volt decoder only. Connecting the cradle to a 12 volt decoder can damage the digital scanner and invalidate the warranty. Scanner Emulation Interface 11 - 3 Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults Table 11-1 lists the defaults for the Scanner Emulation host. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Scanner Emulation Host Parameters section beginning on page 11-4. NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters. Table 11-1 Scanner Emulation Default Table Parameter Default Page Number Beep Style Beep on Successful Transmit Parameter Pass-Through Parameter Process and Pass Through Convert Newer Code Types Convert Newer Code Types Module Width 20 s Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Do Not Convert Bar Codes to Code 39 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Transmission Timeout Disable 3 sec Ignore Unknown Characters Ignore Unknown Characters Leading Margin 2 ms 11-4 11-5 11-6 11-6 11-7 11-7 11-8 11-9 11-9 Check for Decode LED 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Check for Decode LED 11-10 Scanner Emulation Host Scan the bar code below to enable the Scanner Emulation host. Undecoded Scanner Emulation Host 11 - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Scanner Emulation Host Parameters Beep Style The Scanner Emulation host supports three beep styles.
Beep On Successful Transmit: The digital scanner beeps when the attached decoder issues the decode signal to the digital scanner, so the digital scanner and the attached decoder beep at the same time.
Beep At Decode Time: The digital scanner beeps upon decode. This results in a double beep sequence from most decoders, since the digital scanner beeps, and the decoder beeps (at a different frequency) when it successfully decodes the output.
Do Not Beep: Only the attached decoder issues the decode beep. Beep At Decode Time
*Beep On Successful Transmit Do Not Beep Scanner Emulation Interface 11 - 5 Parameter Pass-Through The Scanner Emulation host can process parameter bar code messages and send them to the attached decoder. In this way, customers using Symbol compliant decoders can control the behavior of the entire system by scanning the necessary parameters only once. For example, to enable D 2 of 5, scan the D 2 of 5 Enable parameter bar code. The digital scanner and the attached decoder both process the parameter.
*Parameter Process and Pass-Through Parameter Process Only 11 - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Convert Newer Code Types The digital scanner supports a variety of code types that are not decodable by attached decoder systems. To allow compatibility in these environments, the digital scanner converts these code types to more commonly decodable symbologies, as per the following chart. Symbologies not listed on this chart are transmitted normally. Scan this code type:
Transmitted as:
Code 11 Chinese 2 of 5 Code 39 Code 39 GS1 DataBar (14, Limited, and Expanded) Code 128 Coupon Code Code 128 When decoding these code types with this parameter disabled, the digital scanner issues Convert Error beeps and transmits no data.
*Convert Newer Code Types Module Width The standard module width is 20 s. For an extremely slow decoder system, select 50 s Module Width. Reject Newer Code Types
*20 s Module Width 50 s Module Width Scanner Emulation Interface 11 - 7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Scan the bar code below to enable or disable the conversion of all bar code data to Code 39.
*Do Not Convert Bar Codes To Code 39 Convert All To Code 39 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion By default, any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced by a space. If this parameter is enabled, the data sent to the Scanner Emulation host is encoded in Code 39 Full ASCII. The host must be able to interpret Code 39 Full ASCII data. This setting applies only if Convert to Code 39 is also enabled.
*Disable Convert Code 39 To Full ASCII Enable Convert Code 39 To Full ASCII 11 - 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Transmission Timeout The Scanner Emulation host transmits bar code data to the attached decoder and waits for the decoder to assert the Decode signal, indicating successful transmission. If, after a specified amount of time, the Decode signal is not asserted (indicating that the attached decoder has not successfully received the bar code data), the digital scanner issues transmit error beeps. Scan a bar code below to select the desired transmission timeout.
*3 Second Transmission Timeout 5 Second Transmission Timeout 30 Second Transmission Timeout 4 Second Transmission Timeout 10 Second Transmission Timeout Scanner Emulation Interface 11 - 9 Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the decoder does not recognize. When Ignore Unknown Characters is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound. When Convert Error on Unknown Characters is selected, bar codes containing at least one unknown character are not sent to the decoder, and a convert error beep sounds.
*Ignore Unknown Characters Leading Margin Scan a bar code below to select a leading margin duration. Convert Error On Unknown Characters 1 ms Leading Margin 3 ms Leading Margin
*2 ms Leading Margin 11 - 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Leading Margin (continued) 5 ms Leading Margin 10 ms Leading Margin Check For Decode LED The attached decoder normally asserts the Decode line to signal to the Scanner Emulation host that it successfully decoded the transmitted bar code. Some decoders, however, do not assert the Decode signal. In this case, the digital scanner emits transmit error beeps to indicate that the bar code was not successfully transmitted. Scan the Ignore Decode LED bar code to disable the Transmit Error beeps.
*Check For Decode LED Ignore Decode LED Chapter 12 123Scan2 Introduction 123Scan is an easy-to-use, PC-based software tool that enables rapid and easy customized setup of Symbol scanners by Motorola. 123Scan uses a wizard tool to guide users through a streamlined set up process. Settings are saved in a configuration file that can be distributed via e-mail, electronically downloaded via a USB cable, or used to generate a sheet of scannable programming bar codes. Additionally 123Scan can upgrade scanner firmware, check online to enable support for newly released products, generate a collection of multi-setting bar codes if the number of settings is very large, stage large number of scanners simultaneously, generate reports with asset tracking information and create custom products. Communication with 123Scan2 To communicate with the 123Scan program which runs on a host computer running a Windows XP SP2 or Windows Vista operating system, use a USB cable to connect the scanner cradle to the host computer (see USB Connection on page 6-2). 123Scan2 Requirements
Host computer with Windows XP SP2 or Windows Vista
Scanner
Cradle
USB cable. 12 - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide For more information on123Scan, go to:
http://www.motorola.com/123Scan2 To download 123Scan software and access the Help file integrated in the utility, go to:
http://support.symbol.com/support/product/123Scan2.html Chapter 13 OCR Programming Introduction This chapter describes how to set up the digital scanner for OCR programming. The digital scanner can read 6 to 60 point OCR typeface. It supports font types OCR-A, OCR-B, MICR-E13B, and US Currency Serial Number. OCR is not as secure as a bar code. To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading, set an accurate OCR template and character subset, and use a check digit. All OCR fonts are disabled by default. Enabling OCR can slow bar code decoding. Enabling more than one OCR font could also slow OCR decoding and impact OCR decoding accuracy. Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates Default
*Disable OCR-A Feature/Option NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars and/or spaces are not merging. 13 - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR Parameter Defaults Table 13-1 lists the defaults for OCR parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 13-3. NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters. Table 13-1 OCR Programming Default Table Parameter Parameter Number Default Page Number OCR Programming Parameters OCR-A OCR-A Variant OCR-B OCR-B Variant MICR E13B US Currency OCR Orientation OCR Lines OCR Minimum Characters OCR Maximum Characters OCR Security Level OCR Subset OCR Quiet Zone OCR Bright Illumination OCR Template OCR Check Digit Modulus F1h A8h F1h ACh F1h A9h F1h ADh F1h AAh F1h ABh F1h AFh F1h B3h F1h B1h F1h B2h F1h 2Ah F1h AEh F1h B7h F1h BDh F1h 23h F1h B0h Disable Full ASCII Disable Full ASCII Disable Disable 0o 1 3 100 80 Selected font variant 50 Disable 54R 1 OCR Check Digit Multiplier F1h BCh 121212121212 OCR Check Digit Validation F1h B6h None 13-3 13-3 13-5 13-6 13-9 13-10 13-10 13-12 13-12 13-13 13-13 13-14 13-14 13-15 13-16 13-25 13-26 13-27 OCR Programming 13 - 3 OCR Programming Parameters Enable/Disable OCR-A Parameter # F1h A8h To enable or disable OCR-A, scan one of the following bar codes. Enable OCR-A OCR-A Variant Parameter # F1 ACh
*Disable OCR-A Font variant sets a processing algorithm and default character subset for the given font. To choose a variant, scan one of the following bar codes. Selecting the most appropriate font variant optimizes performance and accuracy. OCR-A supports the following variants:
OCR-A Full ASCII
!"#$()*+,-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ\^
OCR-A Reserved 1
$*+-./0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
OCR-A Reserved 2
$*+-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
OCR-A Banking
-0123456789<>
Special banking characters output as the following representative characters:
outputs as f outputs as c outputs as h NOTE Enable OCR-A before setting this parameter. If disabling OCR-A, set the variant to its default
(OCR-A Full ASCII). 13 - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR-A Variant (continued)
*OCR-A Full ASCII
(00h) OCR-A Reserved 2
(02h) OCR-A Reserved 1
(01h) OCR-A Banking
(03h) Enable/Disable OCR-B Parameter # F1h A9h To enable or disable OCR-B, scan one of the following bar codes. Enable OCR-B OCR Programming 13 - 5
*Disable OCR-B 13 - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR-B Variant Parameter # F1 ADh OCR-B has the following variants. Selecting the most appropriate font variant affects performance and accuracy.
OCR-B Full ASCII
!#$%()*+,-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ^|
OCR-B Banking
#+-0123456789<>JNP|
OCR-B Limited
+,-./0123456789<>ACENPSTVX
OCR-B Travel Document Version 1 (TD1) 3-Line ID Cards
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
OCR-B Passport
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
OCR-B ISBN 10-Digit Book Numbers
-0123456789>BCEINPSXz
OCR-B ISBN 10 or 13-Digit Book Numbers
-0123456789>BCEINPSXz
OCR-B Travel Document Version 2 (TD2) 2-Line ID Cards
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
OCR-B Visa Type A
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
OCR-B Visa Type B
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ To choose a variant, scan one of the following bar codes. Selecting the following OCR-B variants automatically sets the appropriate OCR Lines on page 13-12. These five variants invoke extensive special algorithms and checking for that particular document type:
Variant Passport TD1 ID Cards TD2 ID Cards Visa Type A Visa Type B OCR Lines Setting 2 3 2 2 2 Selecting one of the ISBN Book Numbers automatically applies the appropriate ISBN checksum, so you do not need to set this. For the best performance in passport reading, fix the target passport and the imaging engine in place (6.5 - 7.5). NOTE Enable OCR-B before setting this parameter. If disabling OCR-B, set the variant to its default
(OCR-B Full ASCII). OCR-B Variant (continued) OCR Programming 13 - 7
*OCR-B Full ASCII
(00h) OCR-B Limited
(02h) OCR-B Passport
(04h) OCR-B Banking
(01h) OCR-B Travel Document Version 1 (TD1) 3 Line ID Cards
(03h) 13 - 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR-B Variant (continued) OCR-B ISBN 10-Digit Book Numbers
(06h) OCR-B Travel Document Version 2 (TD2) 2-Line ID Cards
(08h) OCR-B Visa Type B
(0Ah) OCR-B ISBN 10 or 13-Digit Book Numbers
(07h) OCR-B Visa Type A
(09h) OCR Programming 13 - 9 Enable/Disable MICR E13B Parameter # F1h AAh To enable or disable MICR E13B, scan one of the following bar codes. MICR E 13B uses the following characters:
TOAD characters (Transit, On Us, Amount, and Dash) output as the following representative characters:
outputs as t outputs as a outputs as o outputs as d Enable MICR E13B
*Disable MICR E13B 13 - 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Enable/Disable US Currency Serial Number Parameter # F1 ABh To enable or disable US Currency Serial Number, scan one of the following bar codes. Enable US Currency
*Disable US Currency OCR Orientation Parameter # F1 AFh Select one of five options to specify the orientation of an OCR string to be read:
0o to the imaging engine (default) 270o clockwise (or 90o counterclockwise) to the imaging engine 180o (upside down) to the imaging engine 90o clockwise to the imaging engine
Omnidirectional Setting an incorrect orientation can cause misdecodes.
OCR Programming 13 - 11 OCR Orientation 270o Clockwise
(01h) OCR Orientation 90o Clockwise
(03h) OCR Orientation (continued)
*OCR Orientation 0o
(00h) OCR Orientation 180o Clockwise
(02h) OCR Orientation Omnidirectional
(04h) 13 - 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR Lines Parameter # F1 B3h To select the number of OCR lines to decode, scan one of the following bar codes. Selecting Visas, Passport, TD1, or TD2 ID cards automatically sets the appropriate OCR Lines. Also see OCR-B Variant on page 13-6.
*OCR 1 Line
(001h) OCR 3 Lines
(003h) OCR Minimum Characters Parameter # F1 B1h OCR 2 Lines
(002h) To select the minimum number of OCR characters (not including spaces) per line to decode, scan the following bar code, then scan a three-digit number between 003 and 100 using the numeric keypad in Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting representing the number of OCR characters to decode. Strings of OCR characters less than the minimum are ignored. The default is 003. OCR Minimum Characters OCR Programming 13 - 13 OCR Maximum Characters Parameter # F1 B2h To select the maximum number of OCR characters (including spaces) per line to decode, scan the following bar code, then scan a three-digit number between 003 and 100 using the numeric keypad in Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting represents the number of OCR characters to decode. Strings of OCR characters greater than the maximum are ignored. The default is 100. OCR Maximum Characters OCR Security Level Parameter # F1 2Ah To select the OCR decoding security/confidence level, scan the following bar code, then scan a two-digit number using the numeric keypad in Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting represents the level of confidence. Greater numbers minimize OCR decoding errors but reduce performance. Setting a value that is too high can result in failure to decode. Setting a value that is too low can cause decoding errors. The range of the security level is 10 -
90 and the default is 80. OCR Security Level 13 - 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR Subset Parameter # F1 AEh Set an OCR subset to define a custom group of characters in place of a preset font variant. For example, if scanning only numbers and the letters A, B, and C, create a subset of just these characters to speed decoding. This applies a designated OCR Subset across all enabled OCR fonts. To set or modify the OCR font subset, first enable the appropriate OCR font(s). Next, scan the following bar code, then scan numbers and letters to form the OCR Subset from the alphanumeric keyboard in Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting. Then scan End of Message in Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting. OCR Subset To cancel an OCR subset, for OCR-A or OCR-B, scan OCR-A variant Full ASCII, or OCR-B variant Full ASCII. For MICR E13B or US Currency Serial Number, create a subset which includes all allowed characters in that character set, or scan an option from the Default Parameters on page 5-4 and re-program the digital scanner. OCR Quiet Zone Parameter # F1h B7h This option sets the OCR quiet zone. The digital scanner stops scanning a field when it detects a sufficiently wide blank space. The width of this space is defined by the End of Field option. Used with parsers that tolerate slanted characters, the End of Field count is roughly a count of 8 for a character width. For example if set to 15, then two character widths are an end of line indicator for the parser. Larger end of field numbers require bigger quiet zones at each end of text line. To set a quiet zone, scan the following bar code, then scan a two-digit number using the numeric keypad in Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting. The range of the quiet zone is 20 - 99 and the default is 50, indicating a six character width quiet zone. OCR Quiet Zone OCR Programming 13 - 15 OCR Bright Illumination Parameter # F1h BDh When enabled, image contrast is improved for OCR scanning. Motorola recommends enabling this when the OCR string is longer than 20 characters, and for applications with busy backgrounds such as passport, check, or VISA reading. Enable OCR Bright Illumination
*Disable OCR Bright Illumination NOTE Enabling OCR Bright Illumination causes the aiming pattern to blink due to the lower frame rate setting. 13 - 16 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR Template Parameter # F1 23h This option creates a template for precisely matching scanned OCR characters to a desired input format. Carefully constructing an OCR template eliminates scanning errors. To set or modify the OCR decode template, scan the OCR Template bar code, then bar codes corresponding to numbers and letters on the following pages to form the template expression. Then scan End of Message in Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting. The default is 54R which accepts any character OCR strings. OCR Template End of Message Required Digit (9) Only a numeric character is allowed in this position. Template 99999 Valid data 12987 Valid data 30517 Invalid data 123AB Required Alpha (A) 9 A Only an alpha character is allowed in this position. Template AAA Valid data Valid data Invalid data ABC WXY 12F OCR Programming 13 - 17 Optional Alphanumeric (1) 1 When this option appears in the template string, the data validator accepts an alphanumeric character if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like characters. Template 99991 Valid data 1234A Valid data 12345 Invalid data 1234<
Optional Alpha (2) When this option appears in the template string, the data validator accepts an alpha character if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like characters. 2 Template AAAA2 Valid data ABCDE Valid data Invalid data WXYZ ABCD6 Alpha or Digit (3) 3 The data validator requires an alphanumeric character in this position to validate the incoming data. Template 33333 Valid data 12ABC Valid data WXY34 Invalid data 12AB<
13 - 18 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Any Including Space & Reject (4) The template accepts any character in this position, including space and reject. Rejects are represented as an underscore (_) in the output. This is a good selection for troubleshooting. 4 Template 99499 Valid data 12$34 Valid data 34_98 Any except Space & Reject (5) 5 The template accepts any character in this position except a space or reject. Template 55999 Valid data A.123 Valid data
*Z456 Invalid data A BCD Optional Digit (7) When this option appears in the template string, the template accepts a numeric character if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like characters. Template 99977 Valid data 12345 Valid data Invalid data 789 789AB 7 OCR Programming 13 - 19 Digit or Fill (8) 8 The data validator accepts any numeric or fill character in this position. Template 88899 Valid data 12345 Valid data
>>789 Invalid data
<<789 Alpha or Fill (F) The data validator accepts any alpha or fill character in this position. Template AAAFF Valid data ABCXY Valid data LMN>>
Invalid data ABC<5 Required Space ( ) F Space When this option appears in the template string, the template accepts a space if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like characters. Template 99 99 Valid data 12 34 Invalid data 67891 13 - 20 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Optional Small Special (.)
. When this option appears in the template string, the data validator accepts a special character if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like characters. Small special characters are - , and . Template AA.99 Valid data MN.35 Valid data Invalid data XY98 XYZ12 Other Template Operators These template operators assist in capturing, delimiting, and formatting scanned OCR data. Literal String (" and +)
+
Use either of these delimiting characters surrounding characters from the alphanumeric keyboard in Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting to define a literal string within a template that must be present in scanned OCR data. There are two characters used to delimit required literal strings; if one of the delimiter characters is present in the desired literal string, use the other delimiter. Template
"35+BC"
Valid data 35+BC Invalid data AB+22 OCR Programming 13 - 21 New Line (E) E To create a template of multiple lines, add E between the template of each single line. Template 999EAAAA Valid data Valid data Invalid data 321 BCAD 987 ZXYW XYZW 12 String Extract (C) This operator combined with others defines a string of characters to extract from the scanned data. The string extract is structured as follows:
C CbPe Where:
C is the string extract operator b is the string begin delimiter P is the category (one or more numeric or alpha characters) describing the string representation e is the string end delimiter Values for b and e can be any scannable character. They are included in the output stream. Template C>A>
Incoming data XQ3>ABCDE>
->ATHRUZ>123 1ABCZXYZ Output
>ABCDE>
>ATHRUZ>
No Output
13 - 22 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Ignore to End of Field (D) D This operator causes all characters after a template to be ignored. Use this as the last character in a template expression. Examples for the template 999D:
Template 999D Incoming data 123-PED 357298 193 Output 123 357 193 Skip Until (P1) P 1 This operator allows skipping over characters until a specific character type or a literal string is detected. It can be used in two ways:
P1ct Where:
P1 is the Skip Until operator c is the type of character that triggers the start of output t is one or more template characters P1"s"t Where:
P1 is the Skip Until operator
"s" is one or more literal string characters (see Literal String (" and +) on page 13-20) that trigger the start of output t is one or more template characters
OCR Programming 13 - 23 The trigger character or literal string is included in output from a Skip Until operator, and the first character in the template should accommodate this trigger. Template P1"PN"AA999 Incoming data 123PN9876 PN1234 X-PN3592 Output PN9876 PN1234 PN3592 Skip Until Not (P0) P This operator allows skipping over characters until a specific character type or a literal string is not matched in the output stream. It can be used in two ways:
0 P0ct Where:
P0 is the Skip Until Not operator c is the type of character that triggers the start of output t is one or more template characters P0"s"t Where:
P0 is the Skip Until Not operator
"s" is one or more literal string characters (see Literal String (" and +) on page 13-20) that trigger the start of output t is one or more template characters
13 - 24 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide The trigger character or literal string is not included in output from a Skip Until Not operator. Incoming data BPN3456 PN1234 5341 Incoming data PN3456 5341 PNPN7654 Output 3456 PN1234 5341 Output 3456 5341 7654 Template P0A9999 Template P0"PN"9999 Repeat Previous (R) R This operator allows a template character to repeat one or more times, allowing the capture of variable-length scanned data. The following examples capture two required alpha characters followed by one or more required digits:
Template AA9R Incoming data AB3 PN12345 32RM52700 Output AB3 PN12345 No output Scroll Until Match (S) This operator steps through scanned data one character at a time until the data matches the template. S Template S99999 Incoming data AB3 PN12345 32RM52700 Output No Output 12345 52700 OCR Programming 13 - 25 Template Examples Following are sample templates with descriptions of valid data for each definition. Field Definition
"M"99977
"X"997777"X"
9959775599 A55"-"999"-"99 33A"."99 999992991
"PN98"
Description M followed by three digits and two optional digits. X followed by two digits, four optional digits, and an X. Two digits followed by any character, a digit, two optional digits, any two characters, and two digits. A letter followed by two characters, a dash, three digits, a dash, and two digits. Two alphanumeric characters followed by a letter, a period, and two digits. Five digits followed by an optional alpha, two digits, and an optional alphanumeric. Literal field - PN98 OCR Check Digit Modulus Parameter # F1h B0h This option sets OCR module check digit calculation. The check digit is the last digit (in the rightmost position) in an OCR string and improves the accuracy of the collected data. The check digit is the end product of a calculation made on the incoming data. For check digit calculation, for example Modulus 10, alpha and numeric characters are assigned numeric weights (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 13-26). The calculation is applied to the character weights and the resulting check digit is added to the end of the data. If the incoming data does not match the check digit, the data is considered corrupt. The selected check digit option does not take effect until you set OCR Check Digit Validation. To choose the Check Digit Modulus, such as 10 for modulo 10, scan the following bar code, then scan a three-digit number from 001 to 099 representing the check digit using the numeric keypad in Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting. The default is 1. OCR Check Digit 13 - 26 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR Check Digit Multiplier Parameter # F1h BCh This option sets OCR check digit multipliers for the character positions. For check digit validation, each character in scanned data has an equivalent weight used in the check digit calculation. DS9808 OCR ships with the following weight equivalents:
0 = 0 1 = 1 2 = 2 3 = 3 4 = 4 5 = 5 6 = 6 7 = 7 8 = 8 9 = 9 All other characters are equivalent to one (1). K = 20 L = 21 M = 22 N = 23 O = 24 P = 25 Q = 26 R = 27 S = 28 T = 29 A = 10 B = 11 C = 12 D = 13 E = 14 F = 15 G = 16 H = 17 I = 18 J = 19 U = 30 V = 31 W = 32 X = 33 Y = 34 Z = 35 Space = 0 You can define the multiplier string if it is different from the default. 121212121212 (default) 123456789A (for ISBN, Product Add Right to Left. See OCR Check Digit Validation on page 13-27) For example:
ISBN Multiplier Product Product add 0 10 0 0+
2 9 18 18+
0 8 0 0+
1 7 7 7+
1 6 6 6+
8 5 40 40+
3 4 12 12+
9 3 27 27+
9 2 18 18+
4 1 4 4=
132 ISBN uses modulo 11 for its check digit. In this case, 132 is divisible by 11, so it passes the check digit. To set the check digit multiplier, scan the following bar code, then scan numbers and letters to form the multiplier string from the alphanumeric keyboard in Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting. Then scan End of Message in the Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting. OCR Check Digit Multiplier OCR Programming 13 - 27 OCR Check Digit Validation Parameter # F1h B6h Use OCR Check Digit Validation to protect against scanning errors by applying a check digit validation scheme. The following is a list of options. None No check digit validation, indicating no check digit is applied. This is the default.
*No Check Digit
(00h) Product Add Left to Right Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 13-26). Each digit representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the multiplier, and the sum of these products is computed. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero. Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 132456 (check digit is 6) Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit Multiplier Product Product add 3 2 6 1 1 1 1+ 6+ 6+ 16+ 25+ 36= 90 5 4 5 4 16 25 6 6 36 2 3 6 The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 90 is divisible by 10 (the remainder is zero). Product Add Left to Right
(03h) 13 - 28 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Product Add Right to Left Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 13-26). The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data. The sum of these products is computed. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero. Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 132459 (check digit is 9) Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit Multiplier Product Product add 2 3 5 4 15 8 1 6 6 6+ 15+ 8+ 12+ 10+ 9= 60 9 4 3 1 12 10 9 5 2 The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 60 is divisible by 10 (the remainder is 0). Product Add Right to Left
(01h) Digit Add Left to Right Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 13-26). Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data. The sum of each individual digit in all of the products is then calculated. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero. Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 132456 (check digit is 6) Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit Multiplier Product Digit add 3 2 6 1 1 1 1+ 6+ 6+ 1+6+ 2+5+ 3+6= 36 5 5 25 4 4 16 6 6 36 2 3 6 The Check Digit Modulus is 12. It passes because 36 is divisible by 12 (the remainder is 0). Digit Add Left to Right
(04h) OCR Programming 13 - 29 Digit Add Right to Left Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 13-26). The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data. The sum of each individual digit in all of the products is then calculated. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero. Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 132456 (check digit is 6) Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit Multiplier Product Digit add 3 5 15 1 6 6 6+ 1+5+ 8+ 1+2+ 1+0+ 6= 30 4 3 12 5 2 10 2 4 8 6 1 6 The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 30 is divisible by 10 (the remainder is 0). Digit Add Right to Left
(02h) 13 - 30 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 13-26). The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data. The sum of these products except for the check digit's product is computed. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is equal to the check digit's product. Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 122456 (check digit is 6) Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit Multiplier Product Product add 2 5 10 1 6 6 6+ 10+ 8+ 12+
4 3 12 2 4 8 5 2 10 10=
46 6 1 6 6 The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 46 divided by 10 leaves a remainder of 6. Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder
(05h) OCR Programming 13 - 31 Digit Add Right To Left Simple Remainder Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 13-26). The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data. The sum of each individual digit in all of the products except for the check digit's product is then calculated. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is equal to the check digit's product. Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 122459 (check digit is 6) Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit Multiplier Product Digit add 2 5 10 1 6 6 6+ 1+0+ 8+ 1+2+ 1+0= 19 4 3 12 5 2 10 2 4 8 9 1 9 9 The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 19 divided by 10 leaves a remainder of 9. Digit Add Right to Left Simple Remainder
(06h) Health Industry - HIBCC43 This is the health industry module 43 check digit standard. Health Industry - HIBCC43
(09h) 13 - 32 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter 14 Symbologies Introduction This chapter describes symbology features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features. Before programming, follow the instructions in Chapter 1, Getting Started. To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the digital scanner powers down. NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge. Select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host. To return all features to default values, scan the Set Default Parameter on page 4-4. Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates Default
*Enable UPC-A
(01h) Feature/Option Option Hex Value Scanning Sequence Examples In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to transmit bar code data without the UPC-A check digit, simply scan the Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit bar code under Transmit UPC-A Check Digit on page 14-14. The digital scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry. Other parameters, such as Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 require scanning several bar codes. See the individual parameter, such as Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5, for this procedure. 14 - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter. Symbology Parameter Defaults Table 14-1 lists the defaults for all symbologies parameters. To change the default values, scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide. These new values replace the standard default values in memory. To recall the default parameter values, scan the Set Default Parameter on page 4-4. NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, and miscellaneous default parameters. Table 14-1 Parameter Defaults Parameter Parameter Number Default Page Number UPC/EAN UPC-A UPC-E UPC-E1 EAN-8/JAN 8 EAN-13/JAN 13 Bookland EAN Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (2 and 5 digits) User-Programmable Supplementals Supplemental 1:
Supplemental 2:
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy 01h 02h 0Ch 04h 03h 53h 10h Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Disable Ignore F1h 43h F1h 44h 50h 10 Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID F1h A0h Combined Transmit UPC-A Check Digit Transmit UPC-E Check Digit Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit UPC-A Preamble UPC-E Preamble UPC-E1 Preamble Convert UPC-E to A 28h 29h 2Ah 22h 23h 24h 25h Enable Enable Enable System Character System Character System Character Disable 14-7 14-7 14-8 14-8 14-9 14-9 14-10 14-13 14-13 14-14 14-14 14-15 14-15 14-16 14-17 14-18 14-19 Table 14-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued) Parameter Parameter Number Default Page Number Symbologies 14 - 3 Convert UPC-E1 to A EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend Bookland ISBN Format UCC Coupon Extended Code ISSN EAN Code 128 Code 128 Set Length(s) for Code 128 GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) ISBT 128 ISBT Concatenation Check ISBT Table ISBT Concatenation Redundancy Code 39 Code 39 Trioptic Code 39 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 (Italian Pharmacy Code) Code 32 Prefix Set Length(s) for Code 39 Code 39 Check Digit Verification Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Buffer Code 39 Code 93 Code 93 26h 27h Disable Disable F1h 40h ISBN-10 55h F1h 69h Enable Disable 08h Enable D1h, D2h Any Length 0Eh 54h F1h 41h F1h 42h DFh 00h 0Dh 56h E7h 12h, 13h 30h 2Bh 11h 71h 09h Enable Enable Disable Enable 10 Enable Disable Disable Disable 2 to 55 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable 4 to 55 Set Length(s) for Code 93 1Ah, 1Bh Code 11 Code 11 Set Lengths for Code 11 Code 11 Check Digit Verification 0Ah Disable 1Ch, 1Dh 4 to 55 34h Disable 14-19 14-20 14-21 14-22 14-22 14-23 14-23 14-24 14-25 14-26 14-27 14-27 14-28 14-28 14-29 14-29 14-30 14-31 14-31 14-32 14-32 14-35 14-35 14-37 14-37 14-39 14 - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 14-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued) Parameter Parameter Number Default Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) Set Lengths for I 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) Discrete 2 of 5 Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 Codabar (NW - 7) Codabar Set Lengths for Codabar CLSI Editing NOTIS Editing MSI MSI Set Length(s) for MSI MSI Check Digits Transmit MSI Check Digit MSI Check Digit Algorithm Chinese 2 of 5 Chinese 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 2Fh 06h Disable Disable 16h, 17h 14 31h 2Ch 52h 05h Disable Disable Disable Disable 14h, 15h 12 07h 18h, 19h 36h 37h 0Bh 1Eh, 1Fh 32h 2Eh 33h Disable 5 to 55 Disable Disable Disable 4 to 55 One Disable Mod 10/Mod 10 F0h 98h Disable F1h 6Ah F1h 6Bh F1h 6Ch F1h 6Dh F1h 6Eh F1h 6Fh Disable 1 Length - 14 Disable Disable Disable Page Number 14-40 14-40 14-41 14-43 14-43 14-44 14-44 14-45 14-47 14-47 14-49 14-49 14-50 14-50 14-52 14-52 14-53 14-53 14-54 14-55 14-56 14-56 14-57 Table 14-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued) Parameter Parameter Number Default Page Number Symbologies 14 - 5 Korean 3 of 5 Korean 3 of 5 Inverse 1D Postal Codes US Postnet US Planet Transmit US Postal Check Digit UK Postal Transmit UK Postal Check Digit Japan Postal Australian Postal Netherlands KIX Code USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail UPU FICS Postal GS1 DataBar GS1 DataBar-14 GS1 DataBar Limited GS1 DataBar Expanded Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN Composite Composite CC-C Composite CC-A/B Composite TLC-39 UPC Composite Mode Composite Beep Mode F1h 45h F1h 4Ah Disable Regular 59h 5Ah 5Fh 5Bh 60h F0h 22h F0h 23h F0h 46h F1h 50h F1h 63h F0h 52h F0h 53h F0h 54h F0h 8Dh F0h 55h F0h 56h F0h 73h F0h 58h F0h 8Eh Disable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Never Linked Beep As Each Code Type is Decoded GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes F0h ABh Disable 2D Symbologies PDF417 MicroPDF417 0Fh E3h Enable Disable 14-57 14-58 14-59 14-59 14-60 14-60 14-61 14-61 14-62 14-62 14-63 14-63 14-64 14-64 14-65 14-65 14-66 14-66 14-67 14-67 14-68 14-68 14-69 14-69 14 - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 14-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued) Parameter Parameter Number Default Page Number Code 128 Emulation Data Matrix Data Matrix Inverse Maxicode QR Code QR Inverse MicroQR Aztec Aztec Inverse Symbology-Specific Security Levels Redundancy Level Security Level Intercharacter Gap Size Report Version Macro PDF Flush Macro PDF Buffer Abort Macro PDF Entry 7Bh F0h 24h F1h 4Ch F0h 26h F0h 25h F1h 4Bh F1h 3Dh F1h 3Eh F1h 4Dh Disable Enable Regular Disable Enable Regular Enable Enable Regular 4Eh 4Dh 1 0 F0h 7Dh Normal 14-70 14-71 14-71 14-72 14-72 14-73 14-73 14-74 14-74 14-75 14-77 14-78 14-78 14-79 14-79 Symbologies 14 - 7 UPC/EAN Enable/Disable UPC-A Parameter # 01h To enable or disable UPC-A, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable UPC-A
(01h) Enable/Disable UPC-E Parameter # 02h To enable or disable UPC-E, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable UPC-E
(01h) Disable UPC-A
(00h) Disable UPC-E
(00h) 14 - 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Enable/Disable UPC-E1 Parameter # 0Ch UPC-E1 is disabled by default. To enable or disable UPC-E1, scan the appropriate bar code below. NOTE UPC-E1 is not a UCC (Uniform Code Council) approved symbology. Enable UPC-E1
(01h)
*Disable UPC-E1
(00h) Enable/Disable EAN-8/JAN-8 Parameter # 04h To enable or disable EAN-8/JAN-8, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable EAN-8/JAN-8
(01h) Disable EAN-8/JAN-8
(00h) Symbologies 14 - 9 Enable/Disable EAN-13/JAN-13 Parameter # 03h To enable or disable EAN-13/JAN-13, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable EAN-13/JAN-13
(01h) Disable EAN-13/JAN-13
(00h) Enable/Disable Bookland EAN Parameter # 53h To enable or disable Bookland EAN, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Bookland EAN
(01h)
*Disable Bookland EAN
(00h) NOTE If you enable Bookland EAN, select a Bookland ISBN Format on page 14-21. Also select either Decode UPC/EAN Supplementals, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode in Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page 14-10. 14 - 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals Parameter # 10h Supplementals are bar codes appended according to specific format conventions (e.g., UPC A+2, UPC E+2, EAN 13+2). The following options are available:
If you select Ignore UPC/EAN with Supplementals, and the digital scanner is presented with a UPC/EAN plus supplemental symbol, the digital scanner decodes UPC/EAN and ignores the supplemental characters. If you select Decode UPC/EAN with Supplementals, the digital scanner only decodes UPC/EAN symbols with supplemental characters, and ignores symbols without supplementals. If you select Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN Supplementals, the digital scanner decodes UPC/EAN symbols with supplemental characters immediately. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the digital scanner must decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 14-13 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental. If you select one of the following Supplemental Mode options, the digital scanner immediately transmits EAN-13 bar codes starting with that prefix that have supplemental characters. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the digital scanner must decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 14-13 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental. The digital scanner transmits UPC/EAN bar codes that do not have that prefix immediately.
Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode
Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode NOTE If you select 978/979 Supplemental Mode and are scanning Bookland EAN bar codes, see Enable/Disable Bookland EAN on page 14-9 to enable Bookland EAN, and select a format using Bookland ISBN Format on page 14-21.
Enable 977 Supplemental Mode
Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode
Enable 491 Supplemental Mode
Enable Smart Supplemental Mode - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously.
Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with a 3-digit user-defined prefix. Set this 3-digit prefix using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 14-13.
Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with either of two 3-digit user-defined prefixes. Set the 3-digit prefixes using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 14-13.
Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously or the user-defined prefix set using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 14-13.
Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously or one of the two user-defined prefixes set using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 14-13. NOTE To minimize the risk of invalid data transmission, select either to decode or ignore supplemental characters.
Symbologies 14 - 11 Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued) Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Only With Supplementals
(01h) Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
(02h) Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode
(05h)
*Ignore Supplementals
(00h) Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode
(04h) Enable 977 Supplemental Mode
(07h) 14 - 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued) Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode
(06h) Enable 491 Supplemental Mode
(08h) Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1
(09h) Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1
(0Bh) Enable Smart Supplemental Mode
(03h) Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2
(0Ah) Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2
(0Ch) Symbologies 14 - 13 User-Programmable Supplementals Supplemental 1: Parameter # F1h 43h Supplemental 2: Parameter # F1h 44h If you selected a Supplemental User-Programmable option from Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page 14-10, select User-Programmable Supplemental 1 to set the 3-digit prefix. Then select the 3 digits using the numeric bar codes beginning onpage D-1. Select User-Programmable Supplemental 2 to set a second 3-digit prefix. Then select the 3 digits using the numeric bar codes beginning onpage D-1. User-Programmable Supplemental 1 User-Programmable Supplemental 2 UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy Parameter # 50h If you selected Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals, this option adjusts the number of times to decode a symbol without supplementals before transmission. The range is from two to thirty times. Five or above is recommended when decoding a mix of UPC/EAN/JAN symbols with and without supplementals. The default is 10. Scan the bar code below to set a decode redundancy value. Next, scan two numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy 14 - 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format Parameter # F1h A0h Select an output format when reporting UPC/EAN/JAN bar codes with supplementals with AIM ID enabled:
Separate - UPC/EAN with supplementals transmit as ]E<0 or 4><data>]E<1 or 2>[supp data]
Combined - EAN-8 with supplementals transmit as ]E4<data>]E<1 or 2>[supp data]
All other UPC/EAN with supplementals transmit as ]E3<data+supps>
Separate
(00h)
*Combined
(01h) Transmit UPC-A Check Digit Parameter # 28h The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-A check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.
*Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
(01h) Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
(00h) Symbologies 14 - 15 Transmit UPC-E Check Digit Parameter # 29h The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-E check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.
*Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
(01h) Do Not Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
(00h) Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit Parameter # 2Ah The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-E1 check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.
*Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
(01h) Do Not Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
(00h) 14 - 16 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide UPC-A Preamble Parameter # 22h Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. There are three options for transmitting a UPC-A preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit System Character and Country Code (0 for USA), and transmit no preamble. Select the appropriate option to match the host system. No Preamble (<DATA>)
(00h)
*System Character (<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(01h) System Character & Country Code
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(02h) Symbologies 14 - 17 UPC-E Preamble Parameter # 23h Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. There are three options for transmitting a UPC-E preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit System Character and Country Code (0 for USA), and transmit no preamble. Select the appropriate option to match the host system. No Preamble (<DATA>)
(00h)
*System Character (<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(01h) System Character & Country Code
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(02h) 14 - 18 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide UPC-E1 Preamble Parameter # 24h Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. There are three options for transmitting a UPC-E1 preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit System Character and Country Code (0 for USA), and transmit no preamble. Select the appropriate option to match the host system. No Preamble (<DATA>)
(00h)
*System Character (<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(01h) System Character & Country Code
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(02h) Symbologies 14 - 19 Convert UPC-E to UPC-A Parameter # 25h Enable this to convert UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit). Disable this to transmit UPC-E decoded data as UPC-E data, without conversion. Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Enable)
(01h)
*Do Not Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Disable)
(00h) Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A Parameter # 26h Enable this to convert UPC-E1 decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit). Disable this to transmit UPC-E1 decoded data as UPC-E1 data, without conversion. Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Enable)
(01h)
*Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Disable)
(00h) 14 - 20 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend Parameter # 27h Enable this parameter to add five leading zeros to decoded EAN-8 symbols to make them compatible in format to EAN-13 symbols. Disable this to transmit EAN-8 symbols as is. Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend
(01h)
*Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend
(00h) Symbologies 14 - 21 Bookland ISBN Format Parameter # F1h 40h If you enabled Bookland EAN using Enable/Disable Bookland EAN on page 14-9, select one of the following formats for Bookland data:
Bookland ISBN-10 - The digital scanner reports Bookland data starting with 978 in traditional 10-digit format with the special Bookland check digit for backward-compatibility. Data starting with 979 is not considered Bookland in this mode.
Bookland ISBN-13 - The digital scanner reports Bookland data (starting with either 978 or 979) as EAN-13 in 13-digit format to meet the 2007 ISBN-13 protocol.
*Bookland ISBN-10
(00h) Bookland ISBN-13
(01h) NOTE For Bookland EAN to function properly, first enable Bookland EAN using Enable/Disable Bookland EAN on page 14-9, then select either Decode UPC/EAN Supplementals, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode in Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page 14-10. 14 - 22 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide UCC Coupon Extended Code Parameter # 55h Enable this parameter to decode UPC-A bar codes starting with digit 5, EAN-13 bar codes starting with digit 99, and UPC-A/GS1-128 Coupon Codes. UPCA, EAN-13, and GS1-128 must be enabled to scan all types of Coupon Codes.
*Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code
(01h) Disable UCC Coupon Extended Code
(00h) NOTE See UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 14-13 to control autodiscrimination of the GS1-128 (right half) of a coupon code. ISSN EAN Parameter # F1h 69h To enable or disable ISSN EAN, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable ISSN EAN
(01h)
*Disable ISSN EAN
(00h) Symbologies 14 - 23 Code 128 Enable/Disable Code 128 Parameter # 08h To enable or disable Code 128, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable Code 128
(01h) Set Lengths for Code 128 Parameter # L1 = D1h, L2 = D2h Disable Code 128
(00h) The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 128 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. NOTE When setting lengths for different bar code types, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 128 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 128 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 128 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 128 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 128 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 128 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 128 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 128 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 128 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
Any Length - Select this option to decode Code 128 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanners capability.
14 - 24 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Code 128 (continued) Code 128 - One Discrete Length Code 128 - Two Discrete Lengths Code 128 - Length Within Range
*Code 128 - Any Length Enable/Disable GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) Parameter # 0Eh To enable or disable GS1-128, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable GS1-128
(01h) Disable GS1-128
(00h) Symbologies 14 - 25 Enable/Disable ISBT 128 Parameter # 54h ISBT 128 is a variant of Code 128 used in the blood bank industry. Scan a bar code below to enable or disable ISBT 128. If necessary, the host must perform concatenation of the ISBT data.
*Enable ISBT 128
(01h) Disable ISBT 128
(00h) 14 - 26 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide ISBT Concatenation Parameter # F1h 41h Select an option for concatenating pairs of ISBT code types:
If you select Disable ISBT Concatenation, the digital scanner does not concatenate pairs of ISBT codes it encounters. If you select Enable ISBT Concatenation, there must be two ISBT codes in order for the digital scanner to decode and perform concatenation. The digital scanner does not decode single ISBT symbols. If you select Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation, the digital scanner decodes and concatenates pairs of ISBT codes immediately. If only a single ISBT symbol is present, the digital scanner must decode the symbol the number of times set via ISBT Concatenation Redundancy on page 14-27 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no additional ISBT symbol.
*Disable ISBT Concatenation
(00h) Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation
(00h) Enable ISBT Concatenation
(01h)
Symbologies 14 - 27 Check ISBT Table Parameter # F1h 42h The ISBT specification includes a table that lists several types of ISBT bar codes that are commonly used in pairs. If you set ISBT Concatenation to Enable, enable Check ISBT Table to concatenate only those pairs found in this table. Other types of ISBT codes are not concatenated.
*Enable Check ISBT Table
(01h) Disable Check ISBT Table
(00h) ISBT Concatenation Redundancy Parameter # DFh If you set ISBT Concatenation to Autodiscriminate, use this parameter to set the number of times the digital scanner must decode an ISBT symbol before determining that there is no additional symbol. Scan the bar code below, then scan two numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes to set a value between 2 and 20. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. The default is 10. ISBT Concatenation Redundancy 14 - 28 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code 39 Enable/Disable Code 39 Parameter # 00h To enable or disable Code 39, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable Code 39
(01h) Disable Code 39
(00h) Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39 Parameter # 0Dh Trioptic Code 39 is a variant of Code 39 used in the marking of computer tape cartridges. Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters. To enable or disable Trioptic Code 39, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Trioptic Code 39
(01h) NOTE You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously.
*Disable Trioptic Code 39
(00h) Symbologies 14 - 29 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 Parameter # 56h Code 32 is a variant of Code 39 used by the Italian pharmaceutical industry. Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable converting Code 39 to Code 32. NOTE Code 39 must be enabled for this parameter to function. Enable Convert Code 39 to Code 32
(01h)
*Disable Convert Code 39 to Code 32
(00h) Code 32 Prefix Parameter # E7h Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable adding the prefix character A to all Code 32 bar codes. NOTE Convert Code 39 to Code 32 must be enabled for this parameter to function. Enable Code 32 Prefix
(01h)
*Disable Code 32 Prefix
(00h) 14 - 30 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Code 39 Parameter # L1 = 12h, L2 = 13h The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 39 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. If Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled, Length Within a Range or Any Length are the preferred options. NOTE When setting lengths for different bar code types, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 39 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 39 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 39 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 39 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 39 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
Any Length - Select this option to decode Code 39 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanners capability. Code 39 - One Discrete Length Code 39 - Length Within Range Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths Code 39 - Any Length
Symbologies 14 - 31 Code 39 Check Digit Verification Parameter # 30h Enable this feature to check the integrity of all Code 39 symbols to verify that the data complies with specified check digit algorithm. Only Code 39 symbols which include a modulo 43 check digit are decoded. Enable this feature if the Code 39 symbols contain a Modulo 43 check digit. Enable Code 39 Check Digit
(01h)
*Disable Code 39 Check Digit
(00h) Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Parameter # 2Bh Scan a bar code below to transmit Code 39 data with or without the check digit. Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Enable)
(01h)
*Do Not Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Disable)
(00h) NOTE Code 39 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function. 14 - 32 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Parameter # 11h Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full ASCII character set. To enable or disable Code 39 Full ASCII, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Code 39 Full ASCII
(01h)
*Disable Code 39 Full ASCII
(00h) NOTE You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously. Code 39 Full ASCII to Full ASCII Correlation is host-dependent, and is therefore described in the ASCII Character Set Table for the appropriate interface. See the ASCII Character Set for USB on page 6-13 or the ASCII Character Set for RS-232 on page 7-19. Code 39 Buffering - Scan & Store Parameter # 71h This feature allows the digital scanner to accumulate data from multiple Code 39 symbols. Selecting the Scan and Store option (Buffer Code 39) temporarily buffers all Code 39 symbols having a leading space as a first character for later transmission. The leading space is not buffered. Decoding a Code 39 symbol with no leading space transmits in sequence all buffered data in a first-in first-out format, plus the triggering symbol. See the following pages for further details. Select Do Not Buffer Code 39 to transmit all decoded Code 39 symbols immediately without storing them in the buffer. Code 39 Buffering - Scan & Store (continued) This feature affects Code 39 only. If selecting Buffer Code 39, we recommend configuring the digital scanner to decode Code 39 symbology only. Symbologies 14 - 33 Buffer Code 39 (Enable)
(01h)
*Do Not Buffer Code 39 (Disable)
(00h) While there is data in the transmission buffer, you cannot select Do Not Buffer Code 39. The buffer holds 200 bytes of information. To disable Code 39 buffering when there is data in the transmission buffer, first force the buffer transmission (see Transmit Buffer on page 14-34) or clear the buffer. Buffer Data To buffer data, enable Code 39 buffering and scan a Code 39 symbol with a space immediately following the start pattern.
Unless the data overflows the transmission buffer, the digital scanner issues a low/high beep to indicate successful decode and buffering. (For overflow conditions, see Overfilling Transmission Buffer on page 14-34.) The digital scanner adds the decoded data excluding the leading space to the transmission buffer.
No transmission occurs. Clear Transmission Buffer To clear the transmission buffer, scan the Clear Buffer bar code below, which contains only a start character, a dash (minus), and a stop character. The digital scanner issues a short high/low/high beep. The digital scanner erases the transmission buffer.
No transmission occurs. Clear Buffer NOTE The Clear Buffer contains only the dash (minus) character. In order to scan this command, set Code 39 lengths to include length 1.
14 - 34 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Transmit Buffer There are two methods to transmit the Code 39 buffer. 1. Scan the Transmit Buffer bar code below, which includes only a start character, a plus (+), and a stop character. 2. The digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer. The digital scanner issues a low/high beep. Transmit Buffer 3. Scan a Code 39 bar code with a leading character other than a space. The digital scanner appends new decode data to buffered data. The digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer. The digital scanner signals that it transmitted the buffer with a low/high beep. The digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer. NOTE The Transmit Buffer contains only a plus (+) character. In order to scan this command, set Code 39 lengths to include length 1. Overfilling Transmission Buffer The Code 39 buffer holds 200 characters. If the symbol just read overflows the transmission buffer:
The digital scanner indicates that it rejected the symbol by issuing three long, high beeps.
No transmission occurs. The data in the buffer is not affected. Attempt to Transmit an Empty Buffer If you scan the Transmit Buffer symbol and the Code 39 buffer is empty:
A short low/high/low beep signals that the buffer is empty.
No transmission occurs. The buffer remains empty.
Symbologies 14 - 35 Code 93 Enable/Disable Code 93 Parameter # 09h To enable or disable Code 93, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Code 93
(01h) Set Lengths for Code 93 Parameter # L1 = 1Ah, L2 = 1Bh
*Disable Code 93
(00h) The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 93 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 93 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 93 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 93 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 93 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 93 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 93 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
Any Length - Scan this option to decode Code 93 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanners capability.
14 - 36 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Code 93 (continued) Code 93 - One Discrete Length Code 93 - Length Within Range Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths Code 93 - Any Length Symbologies 14 - 37 Code 11 Code 11 Parameter # 0Ah To enable or disable Code 11, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Code 11
(01h) Set Lengths for Code 11 Parameter # L1 = 1Ch, L2 = 1Dh
*Disable Code 11
(00h) The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 11 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 11 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 11 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 11 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 11 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 11 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
Any Length - Scan this option to decode Code 11 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanners capability.
14 - 38 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Code 11 (continued) Code 11 - One Discrete Length Code 11 - Length Within Range Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths Code 11 - Any Length Symbologies 14 - 39 Code 11 Check Digit Verification Parameter # 34h This feature allows the digital scanner to check the integrity of all Code 11 symbols to verify that the data complies with the specified check digit algorithm. This selects the check digit mechanism for the decoded Code 11 bar code. The options are to check for one check digit, check for two check digits, or disable the feature. To enable this feature, scan the bar code below corresponding to the number of check digits encoded in the Code 11 symbols.
*Disable
(00h) Two Check Digits
(02h) One Check Digit
(01h) 14 - 40 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Transmit Code 11 Check Digits Parameter # 2Fh This feature selects whether or not to transmit the Code 11 check digit(s). Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Enable)
(01h) NOTE Code 11 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.
*Do Not Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Disable)
(00h) Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 Parameter # 06h To enable or disable Interleaved 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below, and select an Interleaved 2 of 5 length from the following pages. Enable Interleaved 2 of 5
(01h)
*Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
(00h) Symbologies 14 - 41 Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 Parameter # L1 = 16h, L2 = 17h The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for I 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. The range for Interleaved 2 of 5 lengths is 0 - 55.
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode an I 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
Any Length - Scan this option to decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanners capability. NOTE Due to the construction of the I 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent this, select specific lengths (I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for I 2 of 5 applications.
14 - 42 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 (continued) I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths I 2 of 5 - Any Length Symbologies 14 - 43 I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification Parameter # 31h Enable this feature to check the integrity of all I 2 of 5 symbols to verify the data complies with either the specified Uniform Symbology Specification (USS), or the Optical Product Code Council (OPCC) check digit algorithm.
*Disable
(00h) USS Check Digit
(01h) OPCC Check Digit
(02h) Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit Parameter # 2Ch Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit I 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit. Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Enable)
(01h)
*Do Not Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Disable)
(00h) 14 - 44 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 Parameter # 52h Enable this parameter to convert 14-character I 2 of 5 codes to EAN-13, and transmit to the host as EAN-13. To accomplish this, the I 2 of 5 code must be enabled, and the code must have a leading zero and a valid EAN-13 check digit. Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Enable)
(01h)
*Do Not Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Disable)
(00h) Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5 Parameter # 05h To enable or disable Discrete 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Discrete 2 of 5
(01h)
*Disable Discrete 2 of 5
(00h) Symbologies 14 - 45 Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 Parameter # L1 = 14h, L2 = 15h The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for D 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. The range for Discrete 2 of 5 lengths is 0 - 55.
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a D 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
Any Length - Scan this option to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanners capability. NOTE Due to the construction of the D 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent this, select specific lengths (D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for D 2 of 5 applications.
14 - 46 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 (continued) D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths D 2 of 5 - Any Length Symbologies 14 - 47 Codabar (NW - 7) Enable/Disable Codabar Parameter # 07h To enable or disable Codabar, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Codabar
(01h) Set Lengths for Codabar Parameter # L1 = 18h, L2 = 19h
*Disable Codabar
(00h) The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Codabar to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols with 14 characters, scan Codabar - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Codabar symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Codabar symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Codabar - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
Any Length - Scan this option to decode Codabar symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanners capability.
14 - 48 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Codabar (continued) Codabar - One Discrete Length Codabar - Length Within Range Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths Codabar - Any Length Symbologies 14 - 49 CLSI Editing Parameter # 36h Enable this parameter to strip the start and stop characters and insert a space after the first, fifth, and tenth characters of a 14-character Codabar symbol. Enable this feature if the host system requires this data format. NOTE Symbol length does not include start and stop characters. Enable CLSI Editing
(01h) NOTIS Editing Parameter # 37h
*Disable CLSI Editing
(00h) Enable this parameter to strip the start and stop characters from a decoded Codabar symbol. Enable this feature if the host system requires this data format. Enable NOTIS Editing
(01h)
*Disable NOTIS Editing
(00h) 14 - 50 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide MSI Enable/Disable MSI Parameter # 0Bh To enable or disable MSI, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable MSI
(01h) Set Lengths for MSI Parameter # L1 = 1Eh, L2 = 1Fh
*Disable MSI
(00h) The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for MSI to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only MSI symbols with 14 characters, scan MSI - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only MSI symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select MSI - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a MSI symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode MSI symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan MSI - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
Any Length - Scan this option to decode MSI symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanners capability.
Symbologies 14 - 51 Set Lengths for MSI (continued) NOTE Due to the construction of the MSI symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent this, select specific lengths (MSI - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for MSI applications. MSI - One Discrete Length MSI - Length Within Range MSI - Two Discrete Lengths MSI - Any Length 14 - 52 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide MSI Check Digits Parameter # 32h With MSI symbols, one check digit is mandatory and always verified by the reader. The second check digit is optional. If the MSI codes include two check digits, scan the Two MSI Check Digits bar code to enable verification of the second check digit. See MSI Check Digit Algorithm on page 14-53 for the selection of second digit algorithms.
*One MSI Check Digit
(00h) Two MSI Check Digits
(01h) Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) Parameter # 2Eh Scan a bar code below to transmit MSI data with or without the check digit. Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Enable)
(01h
*Do Not Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Disable)
(00h) Symbologies 14 - 53 MSI Check Digit Algorithm Parameter # 33h Two algorithms are possible for the verification of the second MSI check digit. Select the bar code below corresponding to the algorithm used to encode the check digit. MOD 10/MOD 11
(00h)
*MOD 10/MOD 10
(01h) Chinese 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5 Parameter # F0h 98h To enable or disable Chinese 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Chinese 2 of 5
(01h)
*Disable Chinese 2 of 5
(00h) 14 - 54 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Matrix 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Parameter # F1h 6Ah To enable or disable Matrix 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Matrix 2 of 5
(01h)
*Disable Matrix 2 of 5
(00h) Symbologies 14 - 55 Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 Parameter # L1 = F1h 6Bh, L2 = F1h 6Ch The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Matrix 2 of 5 -
Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Matrix 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Matrix 2 of 5 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
Any Length - Scan this option to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanners capability.
*Matrix 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length Matrix 2 of 5 - Length Within Range Matrix 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths Matrix 2 of 5 - Any Length
14 - 56 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy Parameter # F1h 6Dh To enable or disable Matrix 2 of 5 redundancy, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy
(01h)
*Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy
(00h) Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Parameter # F1h 6Eh The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the Matrix 2 of 5 check digit. Enable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
(01h)
*Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
(00h) Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Parameter # F1h 6Fh Scan a bar code below to transmit Matrix 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit. Symbologies 14 - 57 Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
(01h)
*Do Not Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
(00h) Korean 3 of 5 Enable/Disable Korean 3 of 5 Parameter # F1h 45h To enable or disable Korean 3 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below. NOTE The length for Korean 3 of 5 is fixed at 6. Enable Korean 3 of 5
(01h)
*Disable Korean 3 of 5
(00h) 14 - 58 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Inverse 1D Parameter # F1h 4Ah This parameter sets the 1D inverse decoder setting. Options are:
Regular Only - the digital scanner decodes regular 1D bar codes only. Inverse Only - the digital scanner decodes inverse 1D bar codes only. Inverse Autodetect - the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse 1D bar codes.
*Regular
(00h) Inverse Autodetect
(02h) Inverse Only
(01h)
Symbologies 14 - 59 Postal Codes US Postnet Parameter # 59h To enable or disable US Postnet, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable US Postnet
(01h) US Planet Parameter # 5Ah To enable or disable US Planet, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable US Planet
(01h)
*Disable US Postnet
(00h)
*Disable US Planet
(00h) 14 - 60 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Transmit US Postal Check Digit Parameter # 5Fh Select whether to transmit US Postal data, which includes both US Postnet and US Planet, with or without the check digit.
*Transmit US Postal Check Digit
(01h) Do Not Transmit US Postal Check Digit
(00h) UK Postal Parameter # 5Bh To enable or disable UK Postal, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable UK Postal
(01h)
*Disable UK Postal
(00h) Symbologies 14 - 61 Transmit UK Postal Check Digit Parameter # 60h Select whether to transmit UK Postal data with or without the check digit.
*Transmit UK Postal Check Digit
(01h) Do Not Transmit UK Postal Check Digit
(00h) Japan Postal Parameter # F0h, 22h To enable or disable Japan Postal, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Japan Postal
(01h)
*Disable Japan Postal
(00h) 14 - 62 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Australian Postal Parameter # F0h, 23h To enable or disable Australian Postal, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Australian Postal
(01h)
*Disable Australian Postal
(00h) Netherlands KIX Code Parameter # F0h, 46h To enable or disable Netherlands KIX Code, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Netherlands KIX Code
(01h)
*Disable Netherlands KIX Code
(00h) USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail Parameter # F1h 50h To enable or disable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail, scan the appropriate bar code below. Symbologies 14 - 63 Enable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
(01h)
*Disable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
(00h) UPU FICS Postal Parameter # F1h 63h To enable or disable UPU FICS Postal, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable UPU FICS Postal
(01h)
*Disable UPU FICS Postal
(00h) 14 - 64 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide GS1 DataBar The variants of GS1 DataBar are DataBar-14, DataBar Expanded, and DataBar Limited. The limited and expanded versions have stacked variants. Scan the appropriate bar codes to enable or disable each variant of GS1 DataBar. GS1 DataBar-14 Parameter # F0h 52h. Enable GS1 DataBar-14
(01h) GS1 DataBar Limited Parameter # F0h 53h. Enable GS1 DataBar Limited
(01h)
*Disable GS1 DataBar 14
(00h)
*Disable GS1 DataBar Limited
(00h) Symbologies 14 - 65 GS1 DataBar Expanded Parameter # F0h 54h. Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded
(01h)
*Disable GS1 DataBar Expanded
(00h) Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN Parameter # F0h, 8Dh This parameter only applies to GS1 DataBar-14 and GS1 DataBar Limited symbols not decoded as part of a Composite symbol. Enable this to strip the leading '010' from DataBar-14 and DataBar Limited symbols encoding a single zero as the first digit, and report the bar code as EAN-13. For bar codes beginning with two or more zeros but not six zeros, this parameter strips the leading '0100' and reports the bar code as UPC-A. The UPC-A Preamble parameter that transmits the system character and country code applies to converted bar codes. Note that neither the system character nor the check digit can be stripped. Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN
(01h)
*Disable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN
(00h) 14 - 66 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Composite Composite CC-C Parameter # F0h 55h Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC-C. Enable CC-C
(01h)
*Disable CC-C
(00h) Composite CC-A/B Parameter # F0h 56h Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC-A/B. Enable CC-A/B
(01h)
*Disable CC-A/B
(00h) Composite TLC-39 Parameter # F0h 73h Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type TLC-39. Symbologies 14 - 67 Enable TLC39
(01h) UPC Composite Mode Parameter # F0h 58h
*Disable TLC39
(00h) Select an option for linking UPC symbols with a 2D symbol during transmission as if they were one symbol:
Select UPC Never Linked to transmit UPC bar codes regardless of whether a 2D symbol is detected.
Select UPC Always Linked to transmit UPC bar codes and the 2D portion. If 2D is not present, the UPC bar code does not transmit. If you select Autodiscriminate UPC Composites, the digital scanner determines if there is a 2D portion, then transmits the UPC, as well as the 2D portion if present.
*UPC Never Linked
(00h) Autodiscriminate UPC Composites
(02h) UPC Always Linked
(01h)
14 - 68 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Composite Beep Mode Parameter # F0h, 8Eh To select the number of decode beeps when a composite bar code is decoded, scan the appropriate bar code. Single Beep after both are decoded
(00h)
*Beep as each code type is decoded
(01h) Double Beep after both are decoded
(02h) GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes Parameter # F0h, ABh Select whether to enable or disable this mode. Enable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes
(01h)
*Disable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes
(00h) Symbologies 14 - 69 2D Symbologies Enable/Disable PDF417 Parameter # 0Fh To enable or disable PDF417, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable PDF417
(01h) Enable/Disable MicroPDF417 Parameter # E3h To enable or disable MicroPDF417, scan the appropriate bar code below. Disable PDF417
(00h) Enable MicroPDF417
(01h)
*Disable MicroPDF417
(00h) 14 - 70 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code 128 Emulation Parameter # 7Bh Enable this parameter to transmit data from certain MicroPDF417 symbols as Code 128. AIM Code ID Character
(01h) on page 4-34 must be enabled for this parameter to work. Enable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes:
]C1
]C2
]C0 if the first codeword is 903-905 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 if the first codeword is 910 or 911 Disable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes:
]L3
]L4
]L5 if the first codeword is 903-905 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 if the first codeword is 910 or 911 Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Code 128 Emulation. NOTE Linked MicroPDF codewords 906, 907, 912, 914, and 915 are not supported. Use GS1 Composites instead. Enable Code 128 Emulation
(01h)
*Disable Code 128 Emulation
(00h) Symbologies 14 - 71 Data Matrix Parameter # F0h, 24h To enable or disable Data Matrix, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable Data Matrix
(01h) Disable Data Matrix
(00h) Data Matrix Inverse Parameter # F1h 4Ch This parameter sets the Data Matrix inverse decoder setting. Options are:
Regular Only - the digital scanner decodes regular Data Matrix bar codes only. Inverse Only - the digital scanner decodes inverse Data Matrix bar codes only. Inverse Autodetect - the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse Data Matrix bar codes.
*Regular
(00h) Inverse Autodetect
(02h) Inverse Only
(01h)
14 - 72 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Maxicode Parameter # F0h, 26h To enable or disable Maxicode, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Maxicode
(01h) QR Code Parameter # F0h,25h To enable or disable QR Code, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable QR Code
(01h)
*Disable Maxicode
(00h) Disable QR Code
(00h) Symbologies 14 - 73 QR Inverse Parameter # F1h 4Bh This parameter sets the QR inverse decoder setting. Options are:
Regular Only - the digital scanner decodes regular QR bar codes only. Inverse Only - the digital scanner decodes inverse QR bar codes only. Inverse Autodetect - the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse QR bar codes.
*Regular
(00h) Inverse Autodetect
(02h) MicroQR Parameter # F1h 3Dh To enable or disable MicroQR, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable MicroQR
(01h) Inverse Only
(01h) Disable MicroQR
(00h)
14 - 74 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Aztec Parameter # F1h 3Eh To enable or disable Aztec, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable Aztec
(01h) Disable Aztec
(00h) Aztec Inverse Parameter # F1h 4Dh This parameter sets the Aztec inverse decoder setting. Options are:
Regular Only - the digital scanner decodes regular Aztec bar codes only. Inverse Only - the digital scanner decodes inverse Aztec bar codes only. Inverse Autodetect - the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse Aztec bar codes.
*Regular
(00h) Inverse Autodetect
(02h) Inverse Only
(01h)
Symbologies 14 - 75 Redundancy Level Parameter # 4Eh The digital scanner offers four levels of decode redundancy. Select higher redundancy levels for decreasing levels of bar code quality. As redundancy levels increase, the digital scanners aggressiveness decreases. Select the redundancy level appropriate for the bar code quality. Redundancy Level 1 The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:
Table 14-2 Redundancy Level 1 Codes Code Type Code Length Codabar MSI D 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 8 characters or less 4 characters or less 8 characters or less 8 characters or less Redundancy Level 2 The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:
Table 14-3 Redundancy Level 2 Codes Code Type Code Length All All Redundancy Level 3 Code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded. The following codes must be read three times:
Table 14-4 Redundancy Level 3 Codes Code Type Code Length MSI D 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 Codabar 4 characters or less 8 characters or less 8 characters or less 8 characters or less 14 - 76 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Redundancy Level 4 The following code types must be successfully read three times before being decoded:
Table 14-5 Redundancy Level 4 Codes Code Type Code Length All All
*Redundancy Level 1
(01h) Redundancy Level 3
(03h) Redundancy Level 2
(02h) Redundancy Level 4
(04h) Symbologies 14 - 77 Security Level Parameter # 4Dh The digital scanner offers four levels of decode security for delta bar codes, which include the Code 128 family, UPC/EAN, and Code 93. Select increasing levels of security for decreasing levels of bar code quality. There is an inverse relationship between security and digital scanner aggressiveness, so choose only that level of security necessary for any given application.
Security Level 0: This setting allows the digital scanner to operate in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security in decoding most in-spec bar codes.
Security Level 1: This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.
Security Level 2: Select this option if Security level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
Security Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2 and misdecodes still occur, select this security level. Be advised, selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out of spec bar codes. Selecting this level of security significantly impairs the decoding ability of the digital scanner. If you need this level of security, try to improve the quality of the bar codes.
*Security Level 0
(00h) Security Level 2
(02h) Security Level 1
(01h) Security Level 3
(03h) 14 - 78 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Intercharacter Gap Size Parameter # F0h, 7Dh The Code 39 and Codabar symbologies have an intercharacter gap that is typically quite small. Due to various bar code-printing technologies, this gap can grow larger than the maximum size allowed, preventing the digital scanner from decoding the symbol. If this problem occurs, scan the Large Intercharacter Gaps parameter to tolerate these out-of-specification bar codes.
*Normal Intercharacter Gaps
(06h) Large Intercharacter Gaps
(0Ah) Report Version Scan the bar code below to report the version of software installed in the digital scanner. Report Software Version Symbologies 14 - 79 Macro PDF Features Macro PDF is a special feature for concatenating multiple PDF symbols into one file. The scanner can decode symbols that are encoded with this feature, and can store more than 64 Kb of decoded data stored in up to 50 MacroPDF symbols. CAUTION When printing, keep each Macro PDF sequence separate, as each sequence has unique identifiers. Do not mix bar codes from several Macro PDF sequences, even if they encode the same data. When scanning Macro PDF sequences, scan the entire Macro PDF sequence without interruption. If, when scanning a mixed sequence, the digital scanner emits two long low beeps (Low/Low) this indicates an inconsistent file ID or inconsistent symbology error. Flush Macro Buffer This flushes the buffer of all decoded Macro PDF data stored to that point, transmits it to the host device, and aborts from Macro PDF mode. Flush Macro PDF Buffer Abort Macro PDF Entry This clears all currently-stored Macro PDF data in the buffer without transmission and aborts from Macro PDF mode. Abort Macro PDF Entry 14 - 80 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter 15 Advanced Data Formatting Introduction Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) is a means of customizing data before transmission to the host device. Scan data can be edited to suit particular requirements. To implement ADF, scan a related series of bar codes, which begin on page 15-8, which allows programming the digital scanner with Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) Rules. Avoid using ADF formatting with bar codes containing more than 60 characters. To add a prefix or suffix value for such bar codes, use Prefix/Suffix Values on page 5-34. Using ADF with longer bar codes transmits the bar code in segments of length 252 or less (depending on the host selected), and applies the rule to each segment Rules: Criteria Linked to Actions ADF uses rules to customize data. These rules perform detailed actions when the data meets certain criteria. One rule may consist of single or multiple criteria applied to single or multiple actions. For instance, a data formatting rule could be:
Criteria:
Actions:
When scan data is Code 39, length 12, and data at the start position is the string 129, pad all sends with zeros to length 8, send all data up to X, send a space. Scanning a Code 39 bar code of 1299X1559828 transmits the following: 00001299<space>. If you scan a Code 39 bar code of 1299X15598, this rule is ignored because the bar code did not meet the length criteria. The rule specifies the editing conditions and requirements before data transmission occurs. 15 - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Using ADF Bar Codes When programming a rule, make sure the rule is logically correct. Plan ahead before scanning. To program each data formatting rule:
Start the Rule. Scan the Begin New Rule bar code on page 15-8.
Specify Criteria. Scan the bar codes for all pertinent criteria. Criteria can include code type (e.g., Code 128), code length, or data that contains a specific character string (e.g., the digits 129). See Criteria on page 15-11.
Select Actions. Scan all actions related to, or affecting, these criteria. The actions of a rule specify how to format the data for transmission. See Actions on page 15-24.
Save the Rule. Scan the Save Rule bar code on page 15-8. This places the rule in the top position in the rule buffer. To correct any errors, see Erase on page 15-9 to erase criteria, actions, and entire rules. ADF Bar Code Menu Example This section provides an example of how to enter and use ADF rules for scan data. An auto parts distribution center wants to encode manufacturer ID, part number, and destination code into their own Code 128 bar codes. The distribution center also has products that carry UPC bar codes, placed there by the manufacturer. The Code 128 bar codes have the following format:
MMMMMPPPPPDD Where:
M = Manufacturer ID P = Part Number D = Destination Code The distribution center uses a PC with dedicated control characters for manufacturer ID <CTRL M>, part number
<CTRL P>, and destination code <CTRL D>. At this center the UPC data is treated as manufacturer ID code. The following rules need to be entered:
When scanning data of code type Code 128, send the next 5 characters, send the manufacturer ID key
<CTRL M>, send the next 5 characters, send the part number key <CTRL P>, send the next 2 characters, send the destination code key <CTRL D>. When scanning data of code type UPC/EAN, send all data, send the manufacturer ID key <CTRL M>. To enter these rules, see the following steps.
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 3 Rule 1: The Code 128 Scanning Rule Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Bar Code Begin New Rule Code 128 Send next 5 characters Send <CTRL M>
Send next 5 characters Send <CTRL P>
Send next 2 characters Send <CTRL D>
Save Rule Rule 2: The UPC Scanning Rule Step 1 2 3 4 5 Bar Code Begin New Rule UPC/EAN Send all remaining data Send <CTRL M>
Save Rule On Page 15-8 15-11 15-25 15-45 15-25 15-45 15-24 15-44 15-8 On Page 15-8 15-13 15-24 15-45 15-8 Beep Indication High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High Low High Low Beep Indication High High High High High High High High High Low High Low To correct any errors made while entering this rule, scan the Quit Entering Rules bar code on page 15-9. If you already saved the rule, scan the Erase Previously Saved Rule bar code on page 15-9. Alternate Rule Sets You can group ADF rules into one of four alternate sets which you can turn on and off when needed. This is useful to format the same message in different ways. For example, a Code 128 bar code contains the following information:
Class (2 digits), Stock Number (8) digits, Price (5 digits) The bar code might look like this:
245671243701500 where:
Class = 24 Stock Number = 56712437 Price = 01500 Ordinarily, data is sent as follows:
24 (class key) 56712437 (stock key) 01500 (enter key) But, when there is a sale, send only the following:
24 (class key) 56712437 (stock key) 15 - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide and the cashier keys the price manually. To implement this, first enter an ADF rule that applies to the normal situation, such as:
Scan Rule Belongs to Set 1. When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class key, send the next 8 characters, send the stock key, send the data that remains, send the Enter key. The sale rule may look like this:
Scan Rule Belongs to Set 2. When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class key, send the next 8 characters, send the stock key. To switch between the two sets of rules, program a switching rule that specifies what type of bar code to scan to switch between the rule sets. For example, in the case of the sale rule above, the rule programmer wants the cashier to scan the bar code M before a sale. To do this, a rule can be entered as follows:
When scanning a bar code of length 1 that begins with M, select rule set number 1. Program another rule to switch back. When scanning a bar code of length 1 that begins with N, turn off rule set number 1. Or include the switching back to normal rules in the sale rule:
When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class key, send the next 8 characters, send the stock key, turn off rule set 1. For optimal results, scan the Disable All Rule Sets bar code on page 15-10 after programming a rule belonging to an alternate rule set. In addition to enabling and disabling rule sets within the rules, enable or disable them by scanning the appropriate bar codes on page 15-10. Rules Hierarchy (in Bar Codes) The order of programming individual rules is important.Program the most general rule first. All programmed rules are stored in a buffer. As they are programmed, they are stored at the top of a rules list. If you create three rules, the list is configured as follows:
Third Rule Second Rule First Rule When you scan data, the rules list is checked from top to bottom to determine if the criteria matches (and therefore, if the actions occur). Input is modified into the data format specified by the first matching set of criteria it finds. Be sure to program the most general rule first. For example, if the THIRD rule states:
When scanning a bar code of any length, send all data, then send the ENTER key. And the SECOND rule states:
When scanning a Code 128 bar code of length 12, send the first four characters, then send the ENTER key, then send all remaining data. and you scan a Code 128 bar code of length 12, the THIRD rule applies, and the SECOND rule appears to not function. Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 5 Note that using the standard data editing functions also creates ADF rules. Scan options are entered as ADF rules, and the hierarchy mentioned above also applies to them. For the digital scanner, this applies to prefix/suffix programming in the parameter Scan Data Transmission Format on page 5-35. These rules reside in the same rule list as ADF Rules, so the order you create them is also important. Default Rules Every unit has a default rule to send all scan data. Units with custom software may have one or more default rules burned in. The rules hierarchy checks user programmable rules first, then the default rules. Disable default rules by entering the following general rule in the user programmable buffer:
When receiving scan data, send all data. Since this rule always applies, ADF never applies the default rules. 15 - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide ADF Bar Codes Table 15-1 lists the bar codes available through ADF. Table 15-1 ADF Bar Codes Parameter Page Number Special Commands Pause Duration Begin New Rule Save Rule Erase Quit Entering Rules Disable Rule Set Criteria Code Types Code Lengths 1 Character - 6 Characters 7 Characters - 13 Characters 14 Characters - 20 Characters 21 Characters - 27 Characters 28 Characters - 30 Characters Specific String at Start Specific String, Any Location Any Message OK Numeric Keypad Rule Belongs To Set Actions Send Data Send Data Up To Character Send Next Character Send All Data That Remains Send Next 2 Characters - Send Next 20 Characters Move Cursor 15-8 15-8 15-8 15-8 15-9 15-9 15-10 15-11 15-11 15-15 15-15 15-16 15-17 15-18 15-19 15-19 15-20 15-20 15-21 15-23 15-24 15-24 15-24 15-24 15-24 15-24 15-28 Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 7 Table 15-1 ADF Bar Codes (Continued) Parameter Page Number Send Pause Skip Ahead Skip Back Send Preset Value Remove All Spaces Crunch All Spaces Stop Space Removal Remove Leading Zeros Stop Zero Removal Pad Data with Spaces Pad Data with Zeros Beeps Control Characters Keyboard Characters Send ALT Characters Send Keypad Characters Send Function Key Send F1 Key - Send F24 Key Send PF1 Key - Send PF30 Key Send Right Control Key Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters Send GUI 0 - Send GUI 9 Send GUI A - Send GUI Z Turn On/Off Rule Sets Alphanumeric Keyboard Space - `
0 - 9 A - Z Cancel 15-28 15-29 15-30 15-32 15-32 15-32 15-32 15-33 15-33 15-34 15-38 15-43 15-43 15-48 15-61 15-67 15-72 15-72 15-75 15-79 15-80 15-80 15-81 15-85 15-87 15-87 15-91 15-92 15-96 15 - 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 15-1 ADF Bar Codes (Continued) Parameter End of Message a - z
{ - ~
Page Number 15-96 15-96 15-100 Special Commands Pause Duration Use this parameter, along with Send Pause on page 15-28, to insert a pause in the data transmission. Set the pause by scanning a two-digit number (i.e., two bar codes) from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes in 0.1 second intervals. For example, scanning bar codes 0 and 1 inserts a 0.1 second pause; 0 and 5 inserts a 0.5 second delay. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page D-3. Pause Duration Begin New Rule Scan the bar code below to start entering a new rule
. Save Rule Scan the bar code below to save the rule. Begin New Rule Save Rule Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 9 Erase Use these bar codes to erase criteria, actions, or rules. Erase Criteria And Start Again Erase Actions And Start Again Erase All Rules Erase Previously Saved Rule Quit Entering Rules Scan the bar code below to quit entering rules. Quit Entering Rules 15 - 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Disable Rule Set Use these bar codes to disable rule sets. Disable Rule Set 1 Disable Rule Set 3 Disable All Rule Sets Disable Rule Set 2 Disable Rule Set 4 Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 11 Criteria Code Types Scan the bar codes for all code to be affected by the rule. Scan the codes in succession, prior to selecting other criteria. To select all code types, do not scan any code type. Code 39 GS1 DataBar-14 GS1 DataBar Expanded D 2 OF 5 Codabar GS1 DataBar Limited Code 128 15 - 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code Types (continued) I 2 OF 5 UPC-A EAN-8 IATA 2 OF 5 Code 93 UPC-E EAN-13 Code Types (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 13 MSI UPC-E1 Trioptic Code 39 Code 32 GS1-128 Bookland EAN Code 11 15 - 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code Types (continued) ISBT 128 TLC 39 Coupon Code UPC/EAN Composites GS1 DataBar and EAN128 Composites NOTE When selecting composite bar codes, enable AIM IDs if parsing UPC or EAN composite data, or data from an application that uses symbol separators. Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 15 Code Lengths Scan these bar codes to define the number of characters the selected code type must contain. Select one length per rule only. Do not select any code length to select code types of any length. 1 Character 3 Characters 5 Characters 2 Characters 4 Characters 6 Characters 15 - 16 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code Lengths (continued) 7 Characters 9 Characters 11 Characters 13 Characters 8 Characters 10 Characters 12 Characters Code Lengths (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 17 15 Characters 17 Characters 19 Characters 14 Characters 16 Characters 18 Characters 20 Characters 15 - 18 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code Lengths (continued) 21 Characters 23 Characters 25 Characters 27 Characters 22 Characters 24 Characters 26 Characters Code Lengths (continued) 29 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 19 28 Characters 30 Characters Message Containing A Specific Data String Use this feature to select whether the formatting affects data that begins with a specific character or data string, or contains a specific character or data string. There are 4 features:
Specific String at Start
Specific String, Any Location
Any Message OK
Rule Belongs to Set Specific String at Start 1. Scan the following bar code. 2. Scan the bar codes representing the desired character or characters (up to a total of 8) using the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 15-87. 3. Scan End of Message bar code on page 15-96. Specific String At Start 15 - 20 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Specific String, Any Location 1. Scan the following bar code. 2. Enter a location by scanning a two-digit number representing the position (use a leading zero if necessary) using the Numeric Keypad on page 15-21. 3. Scan the bar codes representing the desired character or characters (up to a total of 8) using the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 15-87. 4. Scan End of Message bar code on page 15-96. Specific String Any Location Any Message OK Do not scan any bar code to format all selected code types, regardless of information contained. Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 21 Numeric Keypad Do not confuse bar codes on this page with those on the alphanumeric keyboard. 0 2 4 6 1 3 5 15 - 22 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Numeric Keypad (continued) 7 9 8 Cancel Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 23 Rule Belongs To Set Select the set to which a rule belongs. There are four possible rule sets. See Alternate Rule Sets on page 15-3 for more information about rule sets. Rule Belongs To Set 1 Rule Belongs To Set 3 Rule Belongs To Set 2 Rule Belongs To Set 4 15 - 24 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Actions Select how to format the data for transmission. Send Data Send all data that remains, send all data up to a specific character selected from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 15-87, or send the next X characters. Note that only bar codes for Send Next 1 to 20 appear here, and can be scanned multiple times to send values greater then 20. For instance, to send the next 28 characters, scan Send Next 20 Characters, then Send Next 8 Characters. Send Data Up To Character Send Next Character Send Next 3 Characters Send All Data That Remains Send Next 2 Characters Send Next 4 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 25 Send Next 6 Characters Send Next 8 Characters Send Next 10 Characters Send Data (continued) Send Next 5 Characters Send Next 7 Characters Send Next 9 Characters Send Next 11 Characters 15 - 26 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Data (continued) Send Next 13 Characters Send Next 15 Characters Send Next 17 Characters Send Next 12 Characters Send Next 14 Characters Send Next 16 Characters Send Next 18 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 27 Send Next 20 Characters Send Data (continued) Send Next 19 Characters Setup Field(s) Table 15-2 Setup Field(s) Definitions Parameter Move Cursor Move Cursor To a Character Description Scan the Move Cursor To Character on page 15-28, then any printable ASCII character from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 15-87. This moves the cursor to the position after the matching character. If the character is not there, the rule fails and ADF tries the next rule. Move Cursor to Start of Data Scan this bar code to move the cursor to the beginning of the data. Move Cursor Past a Character This action moves the cursor past all sequential occurrences of a selected character. For example, if the selected character is A, then the cursor moves past A, AA, AAA, etc. Scan the Move Cursor Past Character on page 15-28, then select a character from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 15-87. If the character is not there, the cursor does not move (i.e., has no effect). Skip Ahead N Characters Scan one of these bar codes to select the number of positions ahead to move the cursor. Skip Back N Characters Scan one of these bar codes to select the number of positions back to move the cursor. Send Preset Value Send Values 1 through 6 by scanning the appropriate bar code. Set these values using the prefix/suffix values in Table 7-4 on page 7-19. Value 1 = Scan Suffix Value 2 = Scan Prefix Values 3-6 are not applicable Page 15-28 15-28 15-28 15-29 15-30 15-30 15 - 28 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Move Cursor Scan a bar code below to move the cursor in relation to a specified character. Then enter a character by scanning a bar code from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 15-87. NOTE If there is no match and the rule fails, the next rule is checked. Move Cursor To Character Move Cursor To Start Move Cursor Past Character Send Pause Scan the bar code below to insert a pause in the transmission of data. See Pause Duration on page 15-8 to set the length of this pause. Send Pause Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 29 Skip Ahead Use the following bar codes to skip ahead characters. Skip Ahead 1 Character Skip Ahead 3 Characters Skip Ahead 5 Characters Skip Ahead 7 Characters Skip Ahead 2 Characters Skip Ahead 4 Characters Skip Ahead 6 Characters 15 - 30 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Skip Ahead (continued) Skip Ahead 8 Characters Skip Ahead 10 Characters Skip Back Use the following bar codes to skip back characters. Skip Back 1 Character Skip Back 3 Characters Skip Ahead 9 Characters Skip Back 2 Characters Skip Back (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 31 Skip Back 5 Characters Skip Back 7 Characters Skip Back 9 Characters Skip Back 4 Characters Skip Back 6 Characters Skip Back 8 Characters Skip Back 10 Characters 15 - 32 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Preset Value Use these bar codes to send preset values. See Prefix/Suffix Values on page 5-34 to set these values. Send Prefix Send Suffix Modify Data Modify data as described below. The following actions work for all send commands that follow it within a rule. Programming pad zeros to length 6, send next 3 characters, stop padding, send next 5 characters, adds three zeros to the first send, and the next send is unaffected by the padding. These options do not apply to the Send Keystroke or Send Preset Value options. Remove All Spaces To remove all spaces in the send commands that follow, scan the bar code below. Crunch All Spaces Remove All Spaces To leave one space between words, scan the bar code below. This also removes all leading and trailing spaces. Stop Space Removal Scan the bar code below to disable space removal. Crunch All Spaces Stop Space Removal Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 33 Remove Leading Zeros Scan the bar code below to remove all leading zeros. Remove Leading Zeros Stop Zero Removal Scan the bar code below to disable the removal of zeros. Stop Zero Removal 15 - 34 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Pad Data with Spaces To pad data to the left, scan the bar code containing the desired number of spaces. Use Send commands to activate this parameter. Pad Spaces To Length 1 Pad Spaces To Length 3 Pad Spaces To Length 5 Pad Spaces To Length 7 Pad Spaces To Length 2 Pad Spaces To Length 4 Pad Spaces To Length 6 Pad Data with Spaces (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 35 Pad Spaces To Length 9 Pad Spaces To Length 11 Pad Spaces To Length 13 Pad Spaces To Length 8 Pad Spaces To Length 10 Pad Spaces To Length 12 Pad Spaces To Length 14 15 - 36 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Pad Data with Spaces (continued) Pad Spaces To Length 15 Pad Spaces To Length 17 Pad Spaces To Length 19 Pad Spaces To Length 21 Pad Spaces To Length 16 Pad Spaces To Length 18 Pad Spaces To Length 20 Pad Data with Spaces (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 37 Pad Spaces To Length 23 Pad Spaces To Length 25 Pad Spaces To Length 27 Pad Spaces To Length 22 Pad Spaces To Length 24 Pad Spaces To Length 26 Pad Spaces To Length 28 15 - 38 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Pad Data with Spaces (continued) Pad Spaces To Length 29 Pad Spaces To Length 30 Stop Pad Spaces Pad Data with Zeros To pad data to the left, scan the bar code containing the desired number of zeros. Use Send commands to activate this parameter. Pad Zeros To Length 1 Pad Zeros To Length 3 Pad Zeros To Length 2 Pad Data with Zeros (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 39 Pad Zeros To Length 5 Pad Zeros To Length 7 Pad Zeros To Length 9 Pad Zeros To Length 4 Pad Zeros To Length 6 Pad Zeros To Length 8 Pad Zeros To Length 10 15 - 40 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Pad Data with Zeros (continued) Pad Zeros To Length 11 Pad Zeros To Length 13 Pad Zeros To Length 15 Pad Zeros To Length 17 Pad Zeros To Length 12 Pad Zeros To Length 14 Pad Zeros To Length 16 Pad Data with Zeros (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 41 Pad Zeros To Length 19 Pad Zeros To Length 21 Pad Zeros To Length 23 Pad Zeros To Length 18 Pad Zeros To Length 20 Pad Zeros To Length 22 Pad Zeros To Length 24 15 - 42 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Pad Data with Zeros (continued) Pad Zeros To Length 25 Pad Zeros To Length 27 Pad Zeros To Length 29 Stop Pad Zeros Pad Zeros To Length 26 Pad Zeros To Length 28 Pad Zeros To Length 30 Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 43 Beeps Select a beep sequence for each ADF rule. Beep Once Beep Three Times Beep Twice Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) Control Characters Scan a Send bar code for the keystroke to send. Send Control 2 Send Control B Send Control A 15 - 44 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Control Characters (continued) Send Control D Send Control F Send Control H Send Control C Send Control E Send Control G Send Control I Control Characters (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 45 Send Control J Send Control L Send Control N Send Control P Send Control K Send Control M Send Control O 15 - 46 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Control Characters (continued) Send Control R Send Control T Send Control V Send Control Q Send Control S Send Control U Send Control W Control Characters (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 47 Send Control X Send Control Z Send Control \
Send Control Y Send Control [
Send Control ]
15 - 48 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Control Characters (continued) Send Control 6 Keyboard Characters Scan a Send bar code for the keyboard characters to send. Send Control -
Send Space Send Send !
Send #
Keyboard Characters (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 49 Send $
Send &
Send (
Send *
Send %
Send Send ) 15 - 50 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters (continued) Send , Send . Send 0 Send +
Send -
Send /
Send 1 Keyboard Characters (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 51 Send 2 Send 4 Send 6 Send 8 Send 3 Send 5 Send 7 15 - 52 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters (continued) Send :
Send <
Send >
Send 9 Send ;
Send =
Send ?
Keyboard Characters (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 53 Send @
Send B Send D Send F Send A Send C Send E 15 - 54 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters (continued) Send H Send J Send L Send G Send I Send K Send M Keyboard Characters (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 55 Send N Send P Send R Send T Send O Send Q Send S 15 - 56 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters (continued) Send V Send X Send Z Send U Send W Send Y Send [
Keyboard Characters (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 57 Send \
Send ^
Send `
Send b Send ]
Send _ Send a 15 - 58 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters (continued) Send d Send f Send h Send c Send e Send g Send i Keyboard Characters (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 59 Send j Send l Send n Send p Send k Send m Send o 15 - 60 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters (continued) Send r Send t Send v Send q Send s Send u Send w Keyboard Characters (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 61 Send x Send z Send |
Send ~
Send ALT Characters Send y Send {
Send }
15 - 62 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Alt 2 Send Alt B Send Alt D Send Alt F Send Alt A Send Alt C Send Alt E Send ALT Characters (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 63 Send Alt H Send Alt J Send Alt L Send Alt G Send Alt I Send Alt K Send Alt M 15 - 64 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send ALT Characters (continued) Send Alt N Send Alt P Send Alt R Send Alt T Send Alt O Send Alt Q Send Alt S Send ALT Characters (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 65 Send Alt V Send Alt X Send Alt Z Send Alt U Send Alt W Send Alt Y Send Alt [
15 - 66 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send ALT Characters (continued) Send Alt \
Send Alt ]
Send Keypad Characters Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 67 Send Keypad *
Send Keypad -
Send Keypad /
Send Keypad 1 Send Keypad +
Send Keypad . Send Keypad 0 15 - 68 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Keypad Characters (continued) Send Keypad 3 Send Keypad 5 Send Keypad 7 Send Keypad 2 Send Keypad 4 Send Keypad 6 Send Keypad 8 Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 69 Send Keypad Enter Send Break Key Send Page Up Key Send Keypad Characters (continued) Send Keypad 9 Send Keypad Numlock Send Delete Key Send End Key 15 - 70 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Keypad Characters (continued) Send Pause Key Send Backspace Key Send Print Screen Key Send Page Down Key Send Scroll Lock Key Send Tab Key Send Insert Key Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 71 Send Enter Key Send Up Arrow Key Send Left Arrow Key Send Keypad Characters (continued) Send Home Key Send Escape Key Send Down Arrow Key Send Right Arrow Key 15 - 72 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Function Key Send F1 Key Send F3 Key Send F5 Key Send F7 Key Send F2 Key Send F4 Key Send F6 Key Send Function Key (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 73 Send F9 Key Send F11 Key Send F13 Key Send F8 Key Send F10 Key Send F12 Key Send F14 Key 15 - 74 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Function Key (continued) Send F15 Key Send F17 Key Send F19 Key Send F21 Key Send F16 Key Send F18 Key Send F20 Key Send Function Key (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 75 Send F23 Key Send PF1 Key Send PF3 Key Send F22 Key Send F24 Key Send PF2 Key Send PF4 Key 15 - 76 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Function Key (continued) Send PF5 Key Send PF7 Key Send PF9 Key Send PF11 Key Send PF6 Key Send PF8 Key Send PF10 Key Send Function Key (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 77 Send PF13 Key Send PF15 Key Send PF17 Key Send PF12 Key Send PF14 Key Send PF16 Key Send PF18 Key 15 - 78 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Function Key (continued) Send PF19 Key Send PF21 Key Send PF23 Key Send PF25 Key Send PF20 Key Send PF22 Key Send PF24 Key Send Function Key (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 79 Send PF27 Key Send PF29 Key Send PF26 Key Send PF28 Key Send PF30 Key Send Right Control Key The Send Right Control Key action will send a tap (press and release) of the Right Control Key. Send Right Control Key 15 - 80 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters The Send Graphic User Interface Character actions taps the specified key while holding the System Dependent Graphic User Interface (GUI) Key. The definition of the Graphic User Interface key depends on the attached system. Send GUI 0 Send GUI 2 Send GUI 4 Send GUI 1 Send GUI 3 Send GUI 5 Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 81 Send GUI 6 Send GUI 8 Send GUI A Send GUI C Send GUI 7 Send GUI 9 Send GUI B 15 - 82 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued) Send GUI E Send GUI G Send GUI I Send GUI D Send GUI F Send GUI H Send GUI J Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued) Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 83 Send GUI K Send GUI M Send GUI O Send GUI Q Send GUI L Send GUI N Send GUI P 15 - 84 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued) Send GUI S Send GUI U Send GUI W Send GUI R Send GUI T Send GUI V Send GUI X Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 85 Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued) Send GUI Y Turn On/Off Rule Sets Use these bar codes to turn rule sets on and off. Turn On Rule Set 1 Turn On Rule Set 3 Send GUI Z Turn On Rule Set 2 Turn On Rule Set 4 15 - 86 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Turn On/Off Rule Sets (continued) Use these bar codes to turn rule sets on and off. Turn Off Rule Set 1 Turn Off Rule Set 3 Turn Off Rule Set 2 Turn Off Rule Set 4 Alphanumeric Keyboard Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 87 Space
$
*
(Single Quote)
-
(Dash)
#
%
+
15 - 88 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
,
(Comma)
!
&
(
.
/
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 89 Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
)
;
=
?
:
<
>
15 - 90 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
[
]
_
(Underscore)
@
\
^
`
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 91 Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) NOTEDo not confuse the numeric bar codes below with those on the numeric keypad. 0 2 4 1 3 5 15 - 92 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) 6 8 A C 7 9 B Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 93 Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) E G I D F H J 15 - 94 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) K M O Q L N P Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 95 Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) S U W R T V X 15 - 96 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) Y Cancel a c Z End of Message b Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 97 Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) e g i d f h j 15 - 98 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) k m o q l n p Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 99 Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) s u w r t v x 15 - 100Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) y
{
}
z
|
~
| 1 2 | User Manual III | Users Manual | 2.79 MiB | January 03 2010 |
Chapter 16 Drivers License Set Up
(DS6878-DL) Introduction The DS6878-DL digital scanner is capable of parsing out information from standard US driver's licenses and certain other American Association of Motor Vehicle Administrators (AAMVA) compliant ID cards. Parsing can be achieved in one of two ways:
Internally embedded algorithms - scanning bar codes activates algorithms internally embedded in the digital scanner to produce formatted data. Use the formatted data for age verification, credit card application information, and more.
Server based parsing algorithms - the digital scanner recognizes the same ID cards but encrypts the content and sends this to a host side application. The host side application uses Motorola's server based parsing algorithms, provided as a .DLL, to produce formatted data. This chapter describes how to program the Symbol DS6878-DL digital scanner to read and use the data contained in the 2D bar codes on US driver's licenses and AAMVA compliant ID cards.
16 - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Drivers License Parsing There are three options available for programming the digital scanner:
No driver's license parsing (default) - disables the feature.
Embedded driver's license parsing - this does not require Motorola software (.DLL). Scan the bar codes on the following pages in the order indicating the sequence of data fields that the digital scanner outputs. See Parsing Drivers License Data Fields (Embedded Driver's License Parsing) on page 16-3 for more information. As jurisdictional updates become available, Motorola updates a series of bar codes on the Motorola Web site: http//www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility/support. These bar codes contain embedded software. Scanning these in conjunction with the bar codes on page 16-4 download jurisdictional software updates to the digital scanner. The updates reside in the digital scanner's Flash memory and apply when the digital scanner is next used.
Server based driver's license parsing - this requires Motorola software (.DLL). The digital scanner recognizes the same ID cards, encrypts the content, and sends it to a host side application that can use Motorola's server based parsing algorithms. Download/install the software from the Motorola Web site at: http//www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility/support. When the Motorola .DLL installs on the host server along with a custom driver's license application, the Symbol DS6878 digital scanner can read 2D bar codes on standard US driver's licenses and AAMVA compliant ID cards to produce formatted data. Use this data for age verification, credit card application information, and more. The Motorola driver's license Software Developer Kit (SDK), available on the Motorola Web site at http//www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility/support, provides scanner software, sample code, a demo application, and Help to develop the application necessary to generate formatted driver's license information. As jurisdictional updates become available, Motorola updates the .DLL on the Motorola Web site. Scan the appropriate bar code below to program the digital scanner.
*No Drivers License Parsing Server Based Drivers License Parsing Embedded Drivers License Parsing Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 3 Parsing Drivers License Data Fields (Embedded Driver's License Parsing) To begin programming a parsing rule:
1. Scan Begin New Drivers License Parse Rule on page 16-4. 2. Scan any of the field bar codes on the following pages, or Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) on page 16-24 to complete the parsing rule. 3. After entering the entire rule, scan Save Drivers License Parse Rule on page 16-4 to save the rule. NOTE Only ONE drivers license parsing rule may be stored in memory at any time. Saving a new rule replaces the prior rule. To abort the programming sequence at any time during programming, scan Quit Entering Drivers License Rule on page 16-4. Any previously saved rule is retained. To erase a programmed saved rule, scan Erase Drivers License Parse Rules on page 16-4. Embedded Driver's License Parsing Criteria - Code Type After specifying the fields and their order for the parsed driver's license, you can also apply standard ADF rules to the parsed data using the Parsed Drivers License criterion bar code in the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide. NOTE Only create standard ADF rules on parsed driver's license data when configured for Embedded Driver's License Parsing. See Embedded Driver's License Parsing ADF Example on page 16-21 for a sample ADF rule using this code type criterion. 16 - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Drivers License Parse Field Bar Codes Begin New Drivers License Parse Rule Quit Entering Drivers License Rule Save Drivers License Parse Rule Erase Drivers License Parse Rules Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 5 Drivers License Parse Field Bar Codes (continued) The parse fields currently supported begin below. Not all IDs present data in the same format. For example, some IDs may have separate fields for first name, last name, and middle initial, and others may have a single field with the entire name. In addition, some IDs may expire on the subject's birth date and the actual expiration date field may only indicate the year. In order to present data in a consistent format, the following nine bar codes return data that may be calculated from the actual data contained within the ID bar code. First Name Last Name Name Prefix Birth Date Middle Name/Initial Name Suffix Expiration Date 16 - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Drivers License Parse Field Bar Codes (continued) Issue Date ID Number (Formatted) AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 7 AAMVA Issuer ID Last Name Middle Name / Initial Name Prefix Full Name First Name Name Suffix 16 - 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued) Mailing Address Line 1 Mailing Address City Mailing Address Postal Code Home Address Line 2 Mailing Address Line 2 Mailing Address State Home Address Line 1 Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 9 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued) Home Address City Home Address State License ID Number License Restrictions Home Address Postal Code License Class License Endorsements 16 - 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued) Height (Feet and/or Inches) Height (Centimeters) Weight (Kilograms) Hair Color Weight (Pounds) Eye Color License Expiration Date Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 11 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued) Birth Date License Issue Date Permit Class Permit ID Number Gender Social Security Number Permit Expiration Date 16 - 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued) Permit Issue Date Permit Endorsements AKA Full Name AKA First Name Permit Restrictions AKA Social Security Name AKA Last Name Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 13 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued) AKA Middle Name / Initial AKA Name Suffix AKA Birth Date Number of Duplicates AKA Name Prefix Issue Timestamp Medical Codes 16 - 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued) Organ Donor Customer ID Document Discriminator Federal Commission Codes Nonresident Weight Range Country Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 15 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued) Place of Birth Inventory Control Std Vehicle Class Std Restrictions Audit Information Race / Ethnicity Std Endorsements 16 - 16 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued) Class Description Restrictions Description Endorsement Description Height in Centimeters Parser Version ID Bar Codes Include this field to emit embedded parser software version identification Height in Inches Parser Version ID Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 17 Parsing Rule Example Scan the following bar codes in sequence to program the digital scanner to extract and transmit first, middle, and last names; mailing address line 1; mailing address line 2; mailing address city; mailing address state; mailing address postal code; and, date of birth. Then, scan a drivers license bar code. NOTE This example applies to RS-232. To use this example with a USB interface, scan Function Key Mapping on page 6-9 in place of the Send Control M (Carriage Return) bar codes. 1 Embedded Drivers License Parsing 2 Begin New Drivers License Parse Rule 3 First Name 5 Middle Name / Initial 4 Send Space 6 Send Space 16 - 18 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Parsing Rule Example (continued) 7 Last Name 9 Mailing Address Line 1 11 Mailing Address Line 2 8 Send Enter Key 10 Send Space 12 Send Enter Key Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 19 Parsing Rule Example (continued) 13 Mailing Address City 15 Mailing Address State 17 Mailing Address Postal Code 14 Send Space 16 Send Space 16 - 20 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Parsing Rule Example (continued) 19 Birth Date 21 Save Drivers Licence Parse Rule 18 Send Enter Key 20 Send Enter Key Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 21 Embedded Driver's License Parsing ADF Example This example creates a parsing rule for parsed data configured to result in the format:
Last Name, First Name 1 Begin New Drivers License Parse Rule 3 Send , 5 First Name 2 Last Name 4 Send Space 6 Save Drivers Licence Parse Rule 16 - 22 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Then, in order to limit the full name to 15 characters, create the following ADF rule:
1 Begin New Rule 3 Action: Send Next 15 Characters 2 Criterion: Parsed Driver's License 4 Save Rule For a license belonging to Michael Williams, the parsed data is Williams, Michael and Williams, Micha after applying the previous ADF rule. Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 23 Field Update Procedure Scan the following bar codes in order to perform a field update. This update COMPLETELY REPLACES prior updates and overrides any embedded parsing software programmed in the digital scanner. 1. Scan Field Update Start. Field Update Start 2. Scan the entire set of PDF bar codes provided separately. 3. Scan Field Update End. Field Update End Scan Erase all Field Updates to completely remove all previous updates. It is not necessary to scan this bar code before performing a normal field update. Scanning this bar code ensures that only the parsing software currently in the digital scanner is used for parsing. Erase all Field Updates 16 - 24 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide User Preferences Set Default Parameter Scan this bar code to return all parameters to the default values listed in Table A-1 on page A-1.
*Set All Defaults Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) Control Characters Scan a Send bar code for the keystroke to send. Send Control A Send Control B Control Characters (continued) Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 25 Send Control D Send Control F Send Control H Send Control C Send Control E Send Control G Send Control I 16 - 26 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Control Characters (continued) Send Control J Send Control L Send Control N Send Control P Send Control K Send Control M Send Control O Control Characters (continued) Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 27 Send Control R Send Control T Send Control V Send Control Q Send Control S Send Control U Send Control W 16 - 28 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Control Characters (continued) Send Control X Send Control Z Send Control \
Send Control Y Send Control [
Send Control ]
Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 29 Control Characters (continued) Send Control 6 Keyboard Characters Scan a Send bar code for the keyboard characters to send. Send Control -
Send Space Send Send !
Send #
16 - 30 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters (continued) Send $
Send &
Send (
Send *
Send %
Send Send ) Keyboard Characters (continued) Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 31 Send , Send . Send 0 Send +
Send -
Send /
Send 1 16 - 32 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters (continued) Send 2 Send 4 Send 6 Send 8 Send 3 Send 5 Send 7 Keyboard Characters (continued) Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 33 Send :
Send <
Send >
Send 9 Send ;
Send =
Send ?
16 - 34 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters (continued) Send @
Send B Send D Send F Send A Send C Send E Keyboard Characters (continued) Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 35 Send H Send J Send L Send G Send I Send K Send M 16 - 36 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters (continued) Send N Send P Send R Send T Send O Send Q Send S Keyboard Characters (continued) Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 37 Send V Send X Send Z Send U Send W Send Y Send [
16 - 38 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters (continued) Send \
Send ^
Send `
Send b Send ]
Send _ Send a Keyboard Characters (continued) Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 39 Send d Send f Send h Send c Send e Send g Send i 16 - 40 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters (continued) Send j Send l Send n Send p Send k Send m Send o Keyboard Characters (continued) Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 41 Send r Send t Send v Send q Send s Send u Send w 16 - 42 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters (continued) Send x Send z Send |
Send ~
Send y Send {
Send }
Keyboard Characters (continued) Send Tab Key Drivers License Set Up (DS6878-DL) 16 - 43 Send Enter Key 16 - 44 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Appendix A Standard Default Parameters Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table Parameter Default Page Number Radio Communications Bluetooth Host (Host Type) Discoverable Mode Country Keyboard Types (Country Code) HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay CAPS Lock Override Ignore Unknown Characters Emulate Keypad Keyboard FN1 Substitution Function Key Mapping Simulated Caps Lock Convert Case Beep on Reconnect Attempt Reconnect Attempt Interval Auto-reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation
(HID Slave) Mode Cradle Host General North American No Delay (0 msec) Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable No Case Conversion Disable 30 sec On Bar Code Data Modes of Operation (Point-to-Point/Multipoint-to-Point) Point-to-Point 4-5 4-7 4-8 4-10 4-10 4-11 4-11 4-12 4-12 4-13 4-13 4-15 4-15 4-17 4-18 Parameter Broadcast (Cradle Host Only) 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Enable 4-19 A - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) Parameter Pairing Modes Pairing on Contacts Connection Maintenance Interval Authentication Variable Pin Code Encryption User Preferences Set Default Parameter Parameter Bar Code Scanning Beep After Good Decode Suppress Power Up Beeps Beeper Tone Beeper Volume Beeper Duration Beep on Insertion Batch Mode Low Power Mode Time Delay to Reduced Power Mode Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Aim Hand-Held Trigger Mode Picklist Mode Mobile Phone/Display Mode Continuous Bar Code Read Decode Session Timeout Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols Fuzzy 1D Processing Default Page Number Unlocked Enable 15 min Disable Static Disable Set Defaults Enable Enable Do Not Suppress Medium High Medium Enabled Normal (Do Not Batch Data) Enabled 1 Sec 15 Sec Level Disabled Always Disable Disable 9.9 Sec 0.5 Sec 0.2 Sec Enable 4-20 4-21 4-24 4-25 4-26 4-27 5-4 5-5 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-9 5-10 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-20 5-21 Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Enable 5-22 Standard Default Parameters A - 3 Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) Parameter Default Page Number Decoding Illumination Multicode Mode Multicode Expression Multicode Mode Concatenation Enable Disable 1 Disable Multicode Concatenation Symbology Concatenate as PDF417 Miscellaneous Options Transmit Code ID Character Prefix Value Suffix 1 Value Suffix 2 Value Scan Data Transmission Format FN1 Substitution Values Transmit No Read Message USB Host Parameters USB Device Type None 7013 <CR><LF>
7013 <CR><LF>
Data as is Set Disable HID Keyboard Emulation USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) North American USB Keystroke Delay USB CAPS Lock Override USB Ignore Unknown Characters Emulate Keypad USB FN1 Substitution Function Key Mapping Simulated Caps Lock Convert Case Ignore Beep Ignore Bar Code Configuration RS-232 Host Parameters No Delay Disable Send Disable Disable Disable Disable No Case Conversion Disable Disable 5-23 5-23 5-24 5-29 5-30 5-33 5-34 5-34 5-35 5-36 5-37 6-4 6-5 6-7 6-7 6-8 6-8 6-9 6-9 6-10 6-10 6-11 6-11 RS-232 Host Types 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Standard 7-6 A - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) Parameter Default Page Number Baud Rate Parity Type Stop Bit Select Data Bits (ASCII Format) Check Receive Errors Hardware Handshaking Software Handshaking Host Serial Response Time-out RTS Line State Beep on <BEL>
Intercharacter Delay Nixdorf Beep/LED Options Ignore Unknown Characters Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters Keyboard Wedge Host Type Country Types (Country Codes) Ignore Unknown Characters Keystroke Delay Intra-Keystroke Delay Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation Caps Lock On Caps Lock Override Convert Wedge Data Function Key Mapping FN1 Substitution Send and Make Break 9600 None 1 Stop Bit 8-Bit Enable None None 2 sec Low RTS Disable 0 msec Normal Operation Send Bar Code IBM PC/AT& IBM PC Compatibles1 North American Send No Delay Disable Disable Disable Disable No Convert Disable Disable Send 7-8 7-9 7-9 7-10 7-11 7-11 7-13 7-15 7-16 7-16 7-17 7-18 7-18 8-4 8-5 8-6 8-7 8-7 8-8 8-8 8-9 8-9 8-10 8-10 8-11 IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) Parameter Port Address Convert Unknown to Code 39 Ignore Beep Ignore Bar Code Configuration Wand Emulation Host Parameters Wand Emulation Host Types Leading Margin Polarity Ignore Unknown Characters Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII Scanner Emulation Beep Style Parameter Pass-Through Convert Newer Code Types Module Width Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Transmission Timeout Ignore Unknown Characters Leading Margin Check for Decode LED 123Scan2 Configuration Tool 123Scan2 Configuration OCR Programming Parameters Standard Default Parameters A - 5 Default Page Number None Selected Disable Disable Disable Symbol OmniLink Interface Controller1 80 msec Bar High/Margin Low Send Disable Disable 9-4 9-5 9-5 9-6 10-4 10-5 10-6 10-6 10-7 10-8 Beep on Successful Transmit 11-4 Parameter Process and Pass Through Convert Newer Code Types 20 s Do Not Convert Bar Codes to Code 39 Disable 3 sec Ignore Unknown Characters 2 ms 11-5 11-6 11-6 11-7 11-7 11-8 11-9 11-9 Check for Decode LED 11-10 None1 12-1 OCR-A 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Disable 13-3 A - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) Parameter Default Page Number OCR-A Variant OCR-B OCR-B Variant MICR E13B US Currency OCR Orientation OCR Lines OCR Minimum Characters OCR Maximum Characters OCR Security Level OCR Subset OCR Quiet Zone OCR Bright Illumination OCR Template OCR Check Digit Modulus OCR Check Digit Multiplier OCR Check Digit Validation UPC/EAN UPC-A UPC-E UPC-E1 EAN-8/JAN 8 EAN-13/JAN 13 Bookland EAN Full ASCII Disable Full ASCII Disable Disable 0o 1 3 100 80 Selected font variant 50 Disable 54R 1 121212121212 None Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Disable Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (2 and 5 digits) Ignore User-Programmable Supplementals Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy 7 13-3 13-5 13-6 13-9 13-10 13-10 13-12 13-12 13-13 13-13 13-14 13-14 13-15 13-16 13-25 13-26 13-27 14-7 14-7 14-8 14-8 14-9 14-9 14-10 14-13 14-13 Transmit UPC-A Check Digit 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Enable 14-14 Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) Parameter Transmit UPC-E Check Digit Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit UPC-A Preamble UPC-E Preamble UPC-E1 Preamble Convert UPC-E to A Convert UPC-E1 to A EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend Bookland ISBN Format UCC Coupon Extended Code ISSN EAN Code 128 Code 128 Set Length(s) for Code 128 GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) ISBT 128 ISBT Concatenation Check ISBT Table ISBT Concatenation Redundancy Code 39 Code 39 Trioptic Code 39 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 (Italian Pharmacy Code) Code 32 Prefix Set Length(s) for Code 39 Code 39 Check Digit Verification Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Standard Default Parameters A - 7 Default Page Number Enable Enable System Character System Character System Character Disable Disable Disable ISBN-10 Disable Disable Enable Any Length Enable Enable Disable Enable 10 Enable Disable Disable Disable 2 to 55 Disable Disable 14-15 14-15 14-16 14-17 14-18 14-19 14-19 14-20 14-21 14-22 14-22 14-23 14-24 14-24 14-25 14-26 14-27 14-27 14-28 14-28 14-29 14-29 14-30 14-31 14-31 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Disable 14-32 A - 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) Parameter Default Page Number Buffer Code 39 Code 93 Code 93 Set Length(s) for Code 93 Code 11 Code 11 Set Lengths for Code 11 Code 11 Check Digit Verification Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) Set Lengths for I 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) Discrete 2 of 5 Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 Codabar (NW - 7) Codabar Set Lengths for Codabar CLSI Editing NOTIS Editing MSI MSI Set Length(s) for MSI MSI Check Digits Disable Disable 4 to 55 Disable 4 to 55 Disable Disable Enable 14 Disable Disable Disable Disable 12 Disable 5 to 55 Disable Disable Disable 2 to 55 One 14-32 14-35 14-35 14-37 14-37 14-39 14-40 14-40 14-41 14-43 14-43 14-44 14-44 14-45 14-47 14-47 14-49 14-49 14-50 14-50 14-52 Transmit MSI Check Digit 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Disable 14-52 Standard Default Parameters A - 9 Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) Parameter Default Page Number MSI Check Digit Algorithm Chinese 2 of 5 Mod 10/Mod 10 Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5 Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Korean 3 of 5 Korean 3 of 5 Inverse 1D Inverse 1D Postal Codes US Postnet US Planet Transmit US Postal Check Digit UK Postal Transmit UK Postal Check Digit Japan Postal Australian Postal Netherlands KIX Code USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail UPU FICS Postal GS1 DataBar GS1 DataBar-14 GS1 DataBar Limited Disable 1 Length - 14 Disable Disable Disable Regular Disable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable 14-53 14-53 14-54 14-55 14-56 14-56 14-57 14-57 14-58 14-59 14-59 14-60 14-60 14-61 14-61 14-62 14-62 14-63 14-63 14-64 14-64 GS1 DataBar Expanded 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Disable 14-65 A - 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) Parameter Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN Composite Composite CC-C Composite CC-A/B Composite TLC-39 UPC Composite Mode Composite Beep Mode Default Page Number Disable Disable Disable Disable Never Linked Beep As Each Code Type is Decoded GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes Disable 2D Symbologies PDF417 MicroPDF417 Code 128 Emulation Data Matrix Data Matrix Inverse Maxicode QR Code QR Inverse MicroQR Aztec Aztec Inverse Symbology-Specific Security Levels Redundancy Level Security Level Intercharacter Gap Size Enable Disable Disable Enable Regular Disable Enable Regular Enable Enable Regular 1 0 Normal Report Version 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. 14-78 14-65 14-66 14-66 14-67 14-67 14-68 14-68 14-69 14-69 14-70 14-71 14-71 14-72 14-72 14-73 14-73 14-74 14-74 14-75 14-77 14-78 Standard Default Parameters A - 11 Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) Parameter Default Page Number Micro PDF Flush Macro PDF Buffer 1 14-79 Abort Macro PDF Entry 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. 14-79 A - 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Appendix B Programming Reference Symbol Code Identifiers Table B-1 Symbol Code Characters Code Character Code Type A B C D E F G H J K L M N R S T U UPC-A, UPC-E, UPC-E1, EAN-8, EAN-13 Code 39, Code 32 Codabar Code 128, ISBT 128, ISBT 128 Concatenated Code 93 Interleaved 2 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5, or Discrete 2 of 5 IATA Code 11 MSI GS1-128 Bookland EAN Trioptic Code 39 Coupon Code GS1 DataBar Family Matrix 2 of 5 UCC Composite, TLC 39 Chinese 2 of 5 B - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table B-1 Symbol Code Characters (Continued) Code Character Code Type V X z P00 P01 P02 P03 P04 P05 P06 P08 P09 P0A P0B P0X Korean 3 of 5 ISSN EAN, PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417 Aztec, Aztec Rune Data Matrix QR Code, MicroQR Maxicode US Postnet US Planet Japan Postal UK Postal Netherlands KIX Code Australian Postal USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail UPU FICS Postal Signature Capture Programming Reference B - 3 AIM Code Identifiers Each AIM Code Identifier contains the three-character string ]cm where:
] = Flag Character (ASCII 93) c = Code Character (see Table B-2) m = Modifier Character (see Table B-3) Table B-2 Aim Code Characters Code Character Code Type A C d E e F G H I L L2 M Q S U z X Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Code 32 Code 128, ISBT 128, ISBT 128 Concatenated, GS1-128, Coupon (Code 128 portion) Data Matrix UPC/EAN, Coupon (UPC portion) GS1 DataBar Family Codabar Code 93 Code 11 Interleaved 2 of 5 PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417 TLC 39 MSI QR Code, MicroQR Discrete 2 of 5, IATA 2 of 5 Maxicode Aztec, Aztec Rune Bookland EAN, ISSN EAN, Trioptic Code 39, Chinese 2 of 5, Matrix 2 of 5, Korean 3 of 5, US Postnet, US Planet, UK Postal, Japan Postal, Australian Postal, Netherlands KIX Code, USPS 4CB/
One Code/Intelligent Mail, UPU FICS Postal, Signature Capture B - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide The modifier character is the sum of the applicable option values based on Table B-3. Table B-3 Modifier Characters Code Type Option Value Code 39 0 1 3 4 5 7 Option No check character or Full ASCII processing. Reader has checked one check character. Reader has checked and stripped check character. Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion. Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked one check character. Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked and stripped check character. Example: A Full ASCII bar code with check character W, A+I+MI+DW, is transmitted as
]A7AIMID where 7 = (3+4). Trioptic Code 39 0 No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0. Example: A Trioptic bar code 412356 is transmitted as ]X0412356 Code 128 0 1 Standard data packet, no Function code 1 in first symbol position. Function code 1 in first symbol character position. I 2 of 5 Codabar Function code 1 in second symbol character position. 2 Example: A Code (EAN) 128 bar code with Function 1 character FNC1 in the first position, AIMID is transmitted as ]C1AIMID 0 1 3 No check digit processing. Reader has validated check digit. Reader has validated and stripped check digit. Example: An I 2 of 5 bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]I04123 0 1 3 No check digit processing. Reader has checked check digit. Reader has stripped check digit before transmission. Example: A Codabar bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]F04123 Code 93 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0. Example: A Code 93 bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as ]G0012345678905 MSI 0 1 Check digits are sent. No check digit is sent. Example: An MSI bar code 4123, with a single check digit checked, is transmitted as
]M14123 Programming Reference B - 5 Table B-3 Modifier Characters (Continued) Code Type Option Value Option D 2 of 5 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0. Example: A D 2 of 5 bar code 4123, is transmitted as ]S04123 UPC/EAN 0 1 2 3 4 Standard data packet in full EAN format, i.e. 13 digits for UPC-A, UPC-E, and EAN-13 (not including supplemental data). Two digit supplemental data only. Five digit supplemental data only. Combined data packet comprising 13 digits from EAN-13, UPC-A or UPC-E symbol and 2 or 5 digits from supplemental symbol. EAN-8 data packet. Example: A UPC-A bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as ]E00012345678905 Bookland EAN 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0. Example: A Bookland EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0123456789X ISSN EAN 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0. Example: An ISSN EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0123456789X Code 11 GS1 DataBar Family 0 1 3 Single check digit Two check digits Check characters validated but not transmitted. No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0. GS1 DataBar-14 and GS1 DataBar Limited transmit with an Application Identifier 01. Note: In GS1-128 emulation mode, GS1 DataBar is transmitted using Code 128 rules (i.e., ]C1). Example: A GS1 DataBar-14 bar code 0110012345678902 is transmitted as
]e00110012345678902. B - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table B-3 Modifier Characters (Continued) Code Type Option Value Option EAN.UCC Composites
(GS1 DataBar, GS1-128, 2D portion of UPC composite) PDF417, Micro PDF417 0 1 2 3 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Native mode transmission. Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules. Standard data packet. Data packet containing the data following an encoded symbol separator character. Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism character. The data packet does not support the ECI protocol. Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism character. The data packet supports the ECI protocol. GS1-128 emulation Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules. Data packet is a GS1-128 symbol (i.e., data is preceded with ]JC1). Reader set to conform to protocol defined in 1994 PDF417 symbology specifications. Note: When this option is transmitted, the receiver cannot reliably determine whether ECIs have been invoked or whether data byte 92DEC has been doubled in transmission. Reader set to follow the ECI protocol (Extended Channel Interpretation). All data characters 92DEC are doubled. Reader set for Basic Channel operation (no escape character transmission protocol). Data characters 92DEC are not doubled. Note: When decoders are set to this mode, unbuffered Macro symbols and symbols requiring the decoder to convey ECI escape sequences cannot be transmitted. The bar code contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915. The bar code contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is in the range 908-909. The bar code contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is in the range 910-911. Example: A PDF417 bar code ABCD, with no transmission protocol enabled, is transmitted as ]L2ABCD. Table B-3 Modifier Characters (Continued) Code Type Option Value Option Programming Reference B - 7 Data Matrix MaxiCode QR Code Aztec 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 C ECC 000-140, not supported. ECC 200. ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position. ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position. ECC 200, ECI protocol implemented. ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position, ECI protocol implemented. ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position, ECI protocol implemented. Symbol in Mode 4 or 5. Symbol in Mode 2 or 3. Symbol in Mode 4 or 5, ECI protocol implemented. Symbol in Mode 2 or 3, ECI protocol implemented in secondary message. Model 1 symbol. Model 2 / MicroQR symbol, ECI protocol not implemented. Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented. Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in first position. Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in first position. Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in second position. Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in second position. Aztec symbol. Aztec Rune symbol. B - 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Appendix C Sample Bar Codes Code 39 123ABC UPC/EAN UPC-A, 100%
0 12345 67890 5 C - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide EAN-13, 100%
3 456789 012340 Code 128 Interleaved 2 of 5 12345678901231 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234 Sample Bar Codes C - 3 GS1 DataBar NOTE GS1 DataBar variants must be enabled to read the bar codes below (see GS1 DataBar on page 14-64). 10293847560192837465019283746029478450366523
(GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked) 1234890hjio9900mnb
(GS1 DataBar Expanded) 08672345650916
(GS1 DataBar Limited) 90876523412674
(GS1 DataBar-14 Stacked) C - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide GS1 DataBar-14 55432198673467
(GS1 DataBar-14 Truncated) 78123465709811
(GS1 DataBar-14 Stacked Omni-Directional) PDF417 Data Matrix Sample Bar Codes C - 5 Maxicode QR Code US Postnet UK Postal C - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes D - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Numeric Bar Codes For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered bar code(s). 0 2 4 1 3 5 6 8 Numeric Bar Codes D - 3 7 9 Cancel To correct an error or change a selection, scan the bar code below. Cancel D - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Appendix E Alphanumeric Bar Codes Alphanumeric Keyboard Space
$
#
%
E - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
*
-
/
+
.
!
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) Alphanumeric Bar Codes E - 3
)
&
(
:
E - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
;
=
?
<
>
@
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) Alphanumeric Bar Codes E - 5
[
]
_
\
^
`
E - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) NOTE The bar codes that follow should not be confused with those on the numeric keypad. 0 2 4 1 3 5 Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) Alphanumeric Bar Codes E - 7 6 8 End of Message 7 9 Cancel E - 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) A C E B D F Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) Alphanumeric Bar Codes E - 9 G I K H J L E - 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) M O Q N P R Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) Alphanumeric Bar Codes E - 11 S U W T V X E - 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) Y a c Z b d Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) Alphanumeric Bar Codes E - 13 e g i f h j E - 14 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) k m o l n p Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) Alphanumeric Bar Codes E - 15 q s u r t v E - 16 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) w y
{
x z
|
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) Alphanumeric Bar Codes E - 17
}
~
E - 18 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Appendix F ASCII Character Sets Table F-1 ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015
%U
$A
$B
$C
$D
$E
$F
$G
$H
$I
$J
$K
$L
$M
$N
$O CTRL 2 CTRL A CTRL B CTRL C CTRL D CTRL E CTRL F CTRL G CTRL H/BACKSPACE1 CTRL I/HORIZONTAL TAB1 CTRL J CTRL K CTRL L CTRL M/ENTER1 CTRL N CTRL O The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent. F - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table F-1 ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043
$P
$Q
$R
$S
$T
$U
$V
$W
$X
$Y
$Z
%A
%B
%C
%D
%E Space
/A
/B
/C
/D
/E
/F
/G
/H
/I
/J
/K CTRL P CTRL Q CTRL R CTRL S CTRL T CTRL U CTRL V CTRL W CTRL X CTRL Y CTRL Z CTRL [
CTRL \
CTRL ]
CTRL 6 CTRL -
Space
!
#
?
%
&
(
)
*
+
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent. ASCII Character Sets F - 3 Table F-1 ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071
/L
-
.
/o 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/Z
%F
%G
%H
%I
%J
%V A B C D E F G
,
-
.
/
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
A B C D E F G The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent. F - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table F-1 ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
%K
%L
%M
%N
%O
%W
+A
+B
+C H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
[
\
]
^
_ a b c The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent. ASCII Character Sets F - 5 Table F-1 ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126
+D
+E
+F
+G
+H
+I
+J
+K
+L
+M
+N
+O
+P
+Q
+R
+S
+T
+U
+V
+W
+X
+Y
+Z
%P
%Q
%R
%S d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
{
I
}
~
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent. F - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table F-2 ALT Key Standard Default Tables ALT Keys Keystroke 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 ALT 2 ALT A ALT B ALT C ALT D ALT E ALT F ALT G ALT H ALT I ALT J ALT K ALT L ALT M ALT N ALT O ALT P ALT Q ALT R ALT S ALT T ALT U ALT V ALT W ALT X ALT Y ALT Z ASCII Character Sets F - 7 Table F-3 Misc. Key Standard Default Table Misc. Key Keystroke 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014 3015 3016 PA 1 PA 2 CMD 1 CMD 2 CMD 3 CMD 4 CMD 5 CMD 6 CMD 7 CMD 8 CMD 9 CMD 10 CMD 11 CMD 12 CMD 13 CMD 14 Table F-4 GUI Shift Keys Other Value Keystroke 3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 3056 GUI 0 GUI 1 GUI 2 GUI 3 GUI 4 GUI 5 GUI 6 GUI 7 GUI 8 The Apple iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key. F - 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table F-4 GUI Shift Keys (Continued) Other Value Keystroke 3057 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 3071 3072 3073 3074 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 3088 3089 3090 GUI 9 GUI A GUI B GUI C GUI D GUI E GUI F GUI G GUI H GUI I GUI J GUI K GUI L GUI M GUI N GUI O GUI P GUI Q GUI R GUI S GUI T GUI U GUI V GUI W GUI X GUI Y GUI Z The Apple iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key. ASCII Character Sets F - 9 Table F-5 PF Key Standard Default Table PF Keys Keystroke 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4007 4008 4009 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 PF 1 PF 2 PF 3 PF 4 PF 5 PF 6 PF 7 PF 8 PF 9 PF 10 PF 11 PF 12 PF 13 PF 14 PF 15 PF 16 Table F-6 F key Standard Default Table F Keys Keystroke 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F - 10 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table F-6 F key Standard Default Table (Continued) F Keys Keystroke 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 5024 F 10 F 11 F 12 F 13 F 14 F 15 F 16 F 17 F 18 F 19 F 20 F 21 F 22 F 23 F 24 Table F-7 Numeric Key Standard Default Table Numeric Keypad Keystroke 6042 6043 6044 6045 6046 6047 6048 6049 6050 6051 6052
*
+
Undefined
-
.
/
0 1 2 3 4 ASCII Character Sets F - 11 Table F-7 Numeric Key Standard Default Table (Continued) Numeric Keypad Keystroke 6053 6054 6055 6056 6057 6058 6059 5 6 7 8 9 Enter Num Lock Table F-8 Extended Keypad Standard Default Table Extended Keypad Keystroke 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 7006 7007 7008 7009 7010 7011 7012 7013 7014 7015 7016 7017 7018 Break Delete Pg Up End Pg Dn Pause Scroll Lock Backspace Tab Print Screen Insert Home Enter Escape Up Arrow Dn Arrow Left Arrow Right Arrow F - 12 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Glossary A Aperture. The opening in an optical system defined by a lens or baffle that establishes the field of view. ASCII. American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A 7 bit-plus-parity code representing 128 letters, numerals, punctuation marks and control characters. It is a standard data transmission code in the U.S. Autodiscrimination. The ability of an interface controller to determine the code type of a scanned bar code. After this determination is made, the information content is decoded. B Bar. The dark element in a printed bar code symbol. Bar Code. A pattern of variable-width bars and spaces which represents numeric or alphanumeric data in machine-readable form. The general format of a bar code symbol consists of a leading margin, start character, data or message character, check character (if any), stop character, and trailing margin. Within this framework, each recognizable symbology uses its own unique format. See Symbology. Bar Code Density. The number of characters represented per unit of measurement (e.g., characters per inch). Bar Height. The dimension of a bar measured perpendicular to the bar width. Bar Width. Thickness of a bar measured from the edge closest to the symbol start character to the trailing edge of the same bar. Bit. Binary digit. One bit is the basic unit of binary information. Generally, eight consecutive bits compose one byte of data. The pattern of 0 and 1 values within the byte determines its meaning. Bits per Second (bps). Bits transmitted or received. Bluetooth. A technology that provides a way to connect and exchange information between devices such as scanners, mobile phones, laptops, PCs, and printers over a secure, globally unlicensed short-range radio frequency. Glossary - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Boot or Boot-up. The process a computer goes through when it starts. During boot-up, the computer can run self-diagnostic tests and configure hardware and software. bps. See Bits Per Second. Byte. On an addressable boundary, eight adjacent binary digits (0 and 1) combined in a pattern to represent a specific character or numeric value. Bits are numbered from the right, 0 through 7, with bit 0 the low-order bit. One byte in memory is used to store one ASCII character. C CDRH. Center for Devices and Radiological Health. A federal agency responsible for regulating laser product safety. This agency specifies various laser operation classes based on power output during operation. CDRH Class 1. This is the lowest power CDRH laser classification. This class is considered intrinsically safe, even if all laser output were directed into the eye's pupil. There are no special operating procedures for this class. CDRH Class 2. No additional software mechanisms are needed to conform to this limit. Laser operation in this class poses no danger for unintentional direct human exposure. Character. A pattern of bars and spaces which either directly represents data or indicates a control function, such as a number, letter, punctuation mark, or communications control contained in a message. Character Set. Those characters available for encoding in a particular bar code symbology. Check Digit. A digit used to verify a correct symbol decode. The scanner inserts the decoded data into an arithmetic formula and checks that the resulting number matches the encoded check digit. Check digits are required for UPC but are optional for other symbologies. Using check digits decreases the chance of substitution errors when a symbol is decoded. Codabar. A discrete self-checking code with a character set consisting of digits 0 to 9 and six additional characters: ( - $ : /
, +). Code 128. A high density symbology which allows the controller to encode all 128 ASCII characters without adding extra symbol elements. Code 3 of 9 (Code 39). A versatile and widely used alphanumeric bar code symbology with a set of 43 character types, including all uppercase letters, numerals from 0 to 9 and 7 special characters (- . / + % $ and space). The code name is derived from the fact that 3 of 9 elements representing a character are wide, while the remaining 6 are narrow. Code 93. An industrial symbology compatible with Code 39 but offering a full character ASCII set and a higher coding density than Code 39. Code Length. Number of data characters in a bar code between the start and stop characters, not including those characters. Cold Boot. A cold boot restarts a computer and closes all running programs. COM Port. Communication port; ports are identified by number, e.g., COM1, COM2. Glossary - 3 Continuous Code. A bar code or symbol in which all spaces within the symbol are parts of characters. There are no intercharacter gaps in a continuous code. The absence of gaps allows for greater information density. Cradle. A cradle is used for charging the terminal battery and for communicating with a host computer, and provides a storage place for the terminal when not in use. D Dead Zone. An area within a scanner's field of view, in which specular reflection may prevent a successful decode. Decode. To recognize a bar code symbology (e.g., UPC/EAN) and then analyze the content of the specific bar code scanned. Decode Algorithm. A decoding scheme that converts pulse widths into data representation of the letters or numbers encoded within a bar code symbol. Decryption. Decryption is the decoding and unscrambling of received encrypted data. Also see, Encryption and Key. Depth of Field. The range between minimum and maximum distances at which a scanner can read a symbol with a certain minimum element width. Discrete Code. A bar code or symbol in which the spaces between characters (intercharacter gaps) are not part of the code. Discrete 2 of 5. A binary bar code symbology representing each character by a group of five bars, two of which are wide. The location of wide bars in the group determines which character is encoded; spaces are insignificant. Only numeric characters (0 to 9) and START/STOP characters may be encoded. E EAN. European Article Number. This European/International version of the UPC provides its own coding format and symbology standards. Element dimensions are specified metrically. EAN is used primarily in retail. Element. Generic term for a bar or space. Encoded Area. Total linear dimension occupied by all characters of a code pattern, including start/stop characters and data. ENQ (RS-232). ENQ software handshaking is also supported for the data sent to the host. ESD. Electro-Static Discharge H HID. Human Interface Device. A Bluetooth host type. Host Computer. A computer that serves other terminals in a network, providing such services as computation, database access, supervisory programs and network control. Glossary - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Hz. Hertz; A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second. I IEC. International Electrotechnical Commission. This international agency regulates laser safety by specifying various laser operation classes based on power output during operation. IEC (825) Class 1. This is the lowest power IEC laser classification. Conformity is ensured through a software restriction of 120 seconds of laser operation within any 1000 second window and an automatic laser shutdown if the scanner's oscillating mirror fails. Intercharacter Gap. The space between two adjacent bar code characters in a discrete code. Interleaved 2 of 5. A binary bar code symbology representing character pairs in groups of five bars and five interleaved spaces. Interleaving provides for greater information density. The location of wide elements (bar/spaces) within each group determines which characters are encoded. This continuous code type uses no intercharacter spaces. Only numeric (0 to 9) and START/STOP characters may be encoded. Interleaved Bar Code. A bar code in which characters are paired together, using bars to represent the first character and the intervening spaces to represent the second. Input/Output Ports. I/O ports are primarily dedicated to passing information into or out of the terminals memory. Series 9000 mobile computers include Serial and USB ports. I/O Ports. interface The connection between two devices, defined by common physical characteristics, signal characteristics, and signal meanings. Types of interfaces include RS-232 and PCMCIA. K Key. A key is the specific code used by the algorithm to encrypt or decrypt the data. Also see, Encryption and Decrypting. L LASER. Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation.The laser is an intense light source. Light from a laser is all the same frequency, unlike the output of an incandescent bulb. Laser light is typically coherent and has a high energy density. Laser Diode. A gallium-arsenide semiconductor type of laser connected to a power source to generate a laser beam. This laser type is a compact source of coherent light. Laser Scanner. A type of bar code reader that uses a beam of laser light. LED Indicator. A semiconductor diode (LED - Light Emitting Diode) used as an indicator, often in digital displays. The semiconductor uses applied voltage to produce light of a certain frequency determined by the semiconductor's particular chemical composition. Glossary - 5 Light Emitting Diode. See LED. M MIL. 1 mil = 1 thousandth of an inch. MIN. Mobile Identification Number. The unique account number associated with a cellular device. It is broadcast by the cellular device when accessing the cellular system. Misread (Misdecode). A condition which occurs when the data output of a reader or interface controller does not agree with the data encoded within a bar code symbol. MRD. Minimum reflective difference. A measurement of print contrast. N Nominal. The exact (or ideal) intended value for a specified parameter. Tolerances are specified as positive and negative deviations from this value. Nominal Size. Standard size for a bar code symbol. Most UPC/EAN codes are used over a range of magnifications (e.g., from 0.80 to 2.00 of nominal). O ODI. See Open Data-Link Interface. Open Data-Link Interface (ODI). Novells driver specification for an interface between network hardware and higher-level protocols. It supports multiple protocols on a single NIC (Network Interface Controller). It is capable of understanding and translating any network information or request sent by any other ODI-compatible protocol into something a NetWare client can understand and process. Open System Authentication. Open System authentication is a null authentication algorithm. P PAN . Personal area network. Using Bluetooth wireless technology, PANs enable devices to communicate wirelessly. Generally, a wireless PAN consists of a dynamic group of less than 255 devices that communicate within about a 33-foot range. Only devices within this limited area typically participate in the network. Parameter. A variable that can have different values assigned to it. Percent Decode. The average probability that a single scan of a bar code would result in a successful decode. In a well-designed bar code scanning system, that probability should approach near 100%. Glossary - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Print Contrast Signal (PCS). Measurement of the contrast (brightness difference) between the bars and spaces of a symbol. A minimum PCS value is needed for a bar code symbol to be scannable. PCS = (RL - RD) / RL, where RL is the reflectance factor of the background and RD the reflectance factor of the dark bars. Programming Mode. The state in which a scanner is configured for parameter values. See Scanning Mode. Q Quiet Zone. A clear space, containing no dark marks, which precedes the start character of a bar code symbol and follows the stop character. QWERTY. A standard keyboard commonly used on North American and some European PC keyboards. QWERTY refers to the arrangement of keys on the left side of the third row of keys. R Reflectance. Amount of light returned from an illuminated surface. Resolution. The narrowest element dimension which is distinguished by a particular reading device or printed with a particular device or method. RF. Radio Frequency. RS-232. An Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard that defines the connector, connector pins, and signals used to transfer data serially from one device to another. S Scan Area. Area intended to contain a symbol. Scanner. An electronic device used to scan bar code symbols and produce a digitized pattern that corresponds to the bars and spaces of the symbol. Its three main components are: 1) Light source (laser or photoelectric cell) - illuminates a bar code,; 2) Photodetector - registers the difference in reflected light (more light reflected from spaces); 3) Signal conditioning circuit - transforms optical detector output into a digitized bar pattern. Scanning Mode. The scanner is energized, programmed and ready to read a bar code. Scanning Sequence. A method of programming or configuring parameters for a bar code reading system by scanning bar code menus. Self-Checking Code. A symbology that uses a checking algorithm to detect encoding errors within the characters of a bar code symbol. Space. The lighter element of a bar code formed by the background between bars. Specular Reflection. The mirror-like direct reflection of light from a surface, which can cause difficulty decoding a bar code. Glossary - 7 SPP. Serial Port Profile. Start/Stop Character. A pattern of bars and spaces that provides the scanner with start and stop reading instructions and scanning direction. The start and stop characters are normally to the left and right margins of a horizontal code. Substrate. A foundation material on which a substance or image is placed. Symbol. A scannable unit that encodes data within the conventions of a certain symbology, usually including start/stop characters, quiet zones, data characters and check characters. Symbol Aspect Ratio. The ratio of symbol height to symbol width. Symbol Height. The distance between the outside edges of the quiet zones of the first row and the last row. Symbol Length. Length of symbol measured from the beginning of the quiet zone (margin) adjacent to the start character to the end of the quiet zone (margin) adjacent to a stop character. Symbology. The structural rules and conventions for representing data within a particular bar code type (e.g. UPC/EAN, Code 39, PDF417, etc.). T Tolerance. Allowable deviation from the nominal bar or space width. U UPC. Universal Product Code. A relatively complex numeric symbology. Each character consists of two bars and two spaces, each of which is any of four widths. The standard symbology for retail food packages in the United States. V Visible Laser Diode (VLD). A solid state device which produces visible laser light. Glossary - 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide Index Numerics 123Scan2 . 12-1 2D bar codes aztec . 14-74 aztec inverse . 14-74 code 128 emulation . 14-70 data matrix . 14-71 data matrix inverse . 14-71 maxicode . 14-72 microPDF417 . 14-69 microQR . 14-73 PDF417 . 14-69 QR code . 14-72 QR inverse . 14-73 A AAMVA field parsing bar codes . 16-7, 16-8, 16-9,
. 16-10,16-11, 16-12,
. 16-13, 16-14,16-15, 16-16 accessories . 1-12 lanyard . 1-12 actions . 15-2 ADF . 15-1 actions . 15-1, 15-24 move cursor . 15-28 send data . 15-24 setup fields . 15-27 alphanumeric keyboard . 15-87 alternate rule sets . 15-3 bar code list . 15-6 bar code menu example . 15-2 beep . 15-43 code lengths . 15-15 code types . 15-11 criteria . 15-1, 15-11 default rules . 15-5 invalid rule . 3-3 move cursor past a character . 15-27 move cursor to a character . 15-27 move cursor to start of data . 15-27 numeric keypad . 15-21, 15-22 pad spaces . 15-34 pad zeros . 15-38 rules . 10-7, 15-1 rules hierarchy . 15-4 send alt characters . 15-61 send control characters . 15-43 send function key . 15-72 send keyboard characters . 15-48 send keypad characters . 15-67 send preset value . 15-27 send value . 15-32 skip ahead "n" characters . 15-27 skip ahead characters . 15-29 skip back "n" characters . 15-27 skip back characters . 15-30 space removal . 15-32 special commands . 15-8 specific data string . 15-19 specific string any location . 15-20 any message ok . 15-20 at start . 15-19 rule belongs to set . 15-23 transmit error . 3-3 turn off rule sets . 15-85, 15-86 zero removal . 15-32 advanced data formatting . 3-3, 10-7, 15-1 actions . 15-1, 15-24 alphanumeric keyboard . 15-87 alternate rule sets . 15-3 Index - 2 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide bar code menu example . 15-2 beep . 15-43 code lengths . 15-15 code types . 15-11 criteria . 15-1, 15-11 default rules . 15-5 numeric keypad . 15-21, 15-22 pad spaces . 15-34 pad zeros . 15-38 rules . 15-1 rules hierarchy . 15-4 send alt characters . 15-61 send control characters . 15-43 send function key . 15-72 send keyboard characters . 15-48 send keypad characters . 15-67 send preset value . 15-32 setup fields . 15-27 skip ahead characters . 15-29 skip back characters . 15-30 space removal . 15-32 special commands . 15-8 specific data string . 15-19 turn off rule sets . 15-85, 15-86 zero removal . 15-32 aiming options hand-held decode aiming pattern . 5-22 aiming pattern . 2-5 enabling . 5-22 orientation . 2-6 ASCII values keyboard wedge . 8-13 RS-232 . 7-19 standard defaults . F-1 USB . 6-12 authentication . 4-2, 4-25 auto-reconnect . 4-4, 4-14, 4-19, 4-23 B bar code defaults all . A-1 IBM . 9-3 keyboard wedge . 8-3 radio communication . 4-2 RS-232 . 7-3 scanner emulation . 11-3 USB . 6-3 user preferences . 5-2 wand emulation . 10-3 bar codes AAMVA field parsing set up . 16-7, 16-8, 16-9, 16-10,
. 16-11, 16-12, 16-13,
. 16-14, 16-15, 16-16 ADF list . 15-6 Australian postal . 14-62 auto-reconnect in Bluetooth keyboard emulation (HID slave) mode . 4-17 auto-reconnect interval . 4-14 aztec . 14-74 aztec inverse . 14-74 batch mode . 5-10, 5-11 battery reconditioning . 1-9 beep after good decode . 5-5 beep on insertion . 5-9 beeper tone . 5-7 beeper volume . 5-8, 5-9 bluetooth friendly name . 4-7 Bluetooth technology support . 4-8 bookland EAN . 14-9 bookland ISBN . 14-21 buffering . 14-32, 14-33 cancel . D-3 Chinese 2 of 5 . 14-53 codabar . 14-47 codabar CLSI editing . 14-49 codabar lengths . 14-47 codabar NOTIS editing . 14-49 code 11 . 14-37 code 11 lengths . 14-37 code 128 . 14-23 code 128 emulation . 14-70 code 128 lengths . 14-23 code 39 . 14-28 transmit buffer . 14-34 code 39 check digit verification . 14-31 code 39 full ASCII . 14-32 code 39 lengths . 14-30 code 39 transmit check digit . 14-31 code 93 . 14-35 code 93 lengths . 14-35 composite CC-A/B . 14-66 composite CC-C . 14-66 composite TLC-39 . 14-67 continuous bar code read . 5-18 convert GS1 databar to UPC/EAN . 14-65 convert UPC-E to UPC-A . 14-19 convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . 14-19 data matrix . 14-71 data matrix inverse . 14-71 data options pause duration . 15-8 decode session timeout . 5-19 discoverable mode . 4-7 discrete 2 of 5 . 14-44 lengths . 14-46 drivers license parsing . 16-2 field updates . 16-23 send control characters . 16-24 send keyboard characters . 16-29 set defaults . 16-24 set up . 16-4, 16-5, 16-6 EAN zero extend . 14-20 EAN-13/JAN-13 . 14-9 EAN-8/JAN-8 . 14-8 flush macro buffer/abort macro PDF entry . 14-79 FN1 substitution values . 5-36 fuzzy 1D processing . 5-21 GS1 catabar limited . 14-64 GS1 DataBar . 14-64 GS1 databar expanded . 14-65 GS1 databar-14 . 14-64 GS1-128 . 14-24 hand-held decode aiming pattern . 5-22 I 2 of 5 check digit verification . 14-43 I 2 of 5 convert to EAN-13 . 14-44 I 2 of 5 transmit check digit . 14-43 IBM 468X/469X convert unknown to code 39 . 9-5 convert unkown to code 39 . 9-5 ignore bar code configuration . 9-6 ignore beep . 9-5 port address . 9-4 illumination . 5-23 interleaved 2 of 5 . 14-40 convert to EAN-13 . 14-44 lengths . 14-41 inverse 1D . 14-58 ISBT 128 . 14-25 ISBT concatenation . 14-26, 14-27 ISBT concatenation redundancy . 14-27 ISSN EAN . 14-22 Japan postal . 14-61 keyboard wedge alternate numeric keypad emulation . 8-8 caps lock on . 8-8 capsl ock override . 8-9 country keyboard types (country codes) . 8-5 host types . 8-4 ignore unknown characters . 8-6 intra-keystroke delay . 8-7 keystroke delay . 8-7 Korean 3 of 5 . 14-57 korean 3 of 5 . 14-57 lock override . 4-20 low power mode . 5-12 matrix 2 of 5 . 14-54 Index - 3 matrix 2 of 5 check digit . 14-56 matrix 2 of 5 lengths . 14-55 matrix 2 of 5 redundancy . 14-56 maxicode . 14-72 microPDF417 . 14-69 microQR . 14-73 mobile phone/display mode . 5-17 MSI . 14-50 MSI check digit algorithm . 14-53 MSI check digits . 14-52 MSI lengths . 14-50 MSI transmit check digit . 14-52 multicode concatenation symbology . 5-30 multicode mode . 5-23, 5-24 multicode mode concatenation . 5-29 multicode troubleshooting . 5-31 Netherlands KIX code . 14-62 numeric bar codes . D-3 OCR bright illumination . 13-15 check digit . 13-25 check digit multiplier . 13-26 check digit validation . 13-27 default table . 13-2 lines . 13-12 maximum characters . 13-13 MICR E13B . 13-9 minimum chararacter . 13-12 OCR-A . 13-3 OCR-A variant . 13-3 OCR-B . 13-5 OCR-B variant . 13-6 orientation . 13-10 parameters . 13-3 quiet zone . 13-14 security level . 13-13 subset . 13-14 template . 13-16 US currency serial number . 13-10 parameter broadcast . 4-19 parameter scanning . 5-5 parser version ID . 16-16 PDF417 . 14-69 picklist modes . 5-16 postal . 14-59 prefix/suffix values . 5-34 QR code . 14-72 QR inverse . 14-73 radio output power . 4-19 reconnect attempt beep . 4-14 reconnect attempt interval . 4-15 RS-232 baud rate . 7-8 beep on . 7-16 Index - 4 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide check receive errors . 7-11 data bits . 7-10 hardware handshaking . 7-11, 7-12 host serial response time-out . 7-15 host types . 7-6 ignore unkown characters . 7-18 intercharacter delay . 7-17 Nixdorf Beep/LED options . 7-18 RTS line state . 7-16 stop bit select . 7-9 RS-232 parameters parity . 7-9 scan data options . 5-35 scanner to cradle support . 4-18 set defaults . 5-4 supplementals . 14-10 symbologies default table . 14-2 time delay to reduced power mode . 5-13 timeout between decodes, different symbols . 5-20 timeout between decodes, same symbol . 5-20 transmit code ID character . 5-33 transmit matrix 2 of 5 check digit . 14-57 transmit no read message . 5-37 transmit UK postal check digit . 14-61 transmit US postal check digit . 14-60 trigger modes . 5-14, 5-15 UCC coupon extended code . 14-22 UK postal . 14-60 unique bar code reporting . 5-18 unpair . 4-21 UPC composite mode . 14-67 UPC/EAN coupon code . 14-22 supp redundancy . 14-13, 14-14 UPC/EAN/JAN supplemental AIM ID format . 14-14 supplemental redundancy . 14-13 UPC-A . 14-7 UPC-A preamble . 14-16 UPC-A/E/E1 check digit . 14-14, 14-15 UPC-E . 14-7 UPC-E preamble . 14-17 UPC-E1 . 14-8 UPU FICS postal . 14-63 US planet . 14-59 US postnet . 14-59 USB caps lock override . 6-7 convert case . 6-10 country keyboard types . 6-5 device type . 6-4 emulate keypad . 6-8 function key mapping . 6-9 keyboard FN 1 sub . 6-9 keystroke delay . 6-7 optional parameters . 6-11 simulated caps lock . 6-10 unknown characters . 6-8 USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail . 14-63 variable PIN code . 4-26 wand emulation code 39 full ASCII . 10-8 convert all bar codes to code 39 . 10-7 host types . 10-4 leading margin (quiet zone) . 10-5 polarity . 10-6 unknown characters . 10-6 bar codes RS-232 software handshaking . 7-13 batch mode stored data . 5-10 battery charging . 1-9 inserting/removing . 1-8 reconditioning . 1-9 shutting off . 1-9 battery reconditioning bar code . 1-9 beeper definitions pairing . 4-3 standard . 2-1 wireless . 4-3 Bluetooth . 1-6, 1-11 Bluetooth disconnect event . 2-2, 3-4, 4-3 bluetooth keyboard emulation . 4-4 Bluetooth security . 4-25 bullets . xix C cables installing . 1-6 character set . 6-12, 7-19, 8-13, F-1 charging . 1-9 LEDs . 1-9 via USB . 1-7 charging LED . 2-3 codabar bar codes CLSI editing . 14-49 codabar . 14-47 lengths . 14-47 NOTIS editing . 14-49 code 11 bar codes code 11 . 14-37 lengths . 14-37 code 128 bar codes code 128 . 14-23 GS1-128 . 14-24 ISBT 128 . 14-25 ISBT concatenation . 14-26, 14-27 ISBT concatenation redundancy . 14-27 lengths . 14-23 code 128 emulation bar codes . 14-70 code 39 bar codes buffering . 14-32, 14-33 check digit verification . 14-31 code 39 . 14-28 full ASCII . 14-32 lengths . 14-30 transmit check digit . 14-31 code 93 bar codes code 93 . 14-35 lengths . 14-35 code ID character . 5-33 code identifiers AIM code IDs . B-3 modifier characters . B-4 Symbol . B-1 code types ADF . 15-11 composite bar codes composite CC-A/B . 14-66 composite CC-C . 14-66 composite TLC-39 . 14-67 UPC composite mode . 14-67 configurations . xvii conventions notational . xviii cradle . 1-6 connecting . 1-6 diagram . 1-4, 1-5 inserting scanner . 1-10 interfaces . 1-2 mounting . 1-7 pinouts . 3-10 supply power . 1-7 cradle parts . 1-4, 1-5 D data matrix bar codes . 14-71 decode zone . 2-7 default parameters all . A-1 IBM . 9-3 keyboard wedge . 8-3 OCR . 13-2 radio communication . 4-2 RS-232 . 7-3 scanner emulation . 11-3 standard default table . F-1 symbologies . 14-2 USB . 6-3 Index - 5 user preferences . 5-2 wand emulation . 10-3 discrete 2 of 5 bar codes discrete 2 of 5 . 14-44 drivers license ADF parsing sample . 16-21 field parsing bar codes . 16-4, 16-5, 16-6 parsing bar codes . 16-2 parsing rule example . 16-17 E encryption . 4-2, 4-27 error indications ack/nak . 7-13 ADF . 3-3 enq . 7-13 format . 3-5 input . 3-3 miscellaneous scanner options . 4-1 RS-232 . 3-3 RS-232 transmission . 7-11 transmission . 3-4, 7-15 unknown characters . 6-8, 7-18, 8-6 xon/xoff . 7-13 exposure options illumination . 5-23 G GS1 DataBar . 14-64 GS1 databar convert GS1 databar to UPC/EAN . 14-65 H HID Profile . 4-6 HID slave . 4-4 host types IBM (port address) . 9-4 keyboard wedge . 8-4 RS-232 . 7-6 scanner emulation . 11-3 USB . 6-4 wand emulation . 10-4 I IBM 468X/469X connection . 9-2 IBM 468X/469X parameters . 9-4 IBM defaults . 9-3 illumination . 5-23 information, service . xix inserting battery . 1-8 Index - 6 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes check digit verification . 14-43 convert to EAN-13 . 14-44 transmit check digit . 14-43 K keyboard wedge connection . 8-2 keyboard wedge defaults . 8-3 keyboard wedge parameters . 8-4 Korean 3 of 5 bar codes . 14-57 L LED battery reconditioning definitions . 1-10 charging . 1-10, 2-3 discharging . 1-10 scanning . 2-3 standard definitions . 2-3 lock override . 4-20 locked pairing mode . 4-20, 4-23 low power mode . 4-14 M macro PDF . 14-79 flush buffer/abort PDF entry . 14-79 maintenance . 3-1 battery . 3-2 cradle . 3-2 digital scanner . 3-1 master . 3-4, 4-4, 4-6, 4-14, 4-19 matrix 2 of 5 bar codes . 14-54 check digit . 14-56 lengths . 14-55 redundancy . 14-56 transmit check digit . 14-57 maxicode bar codes . 14-72 microPDF417 bar codes . 14-69 mounting cradle . 1-7 MSI bar codes check digit algorithm . 14-53 check digits . 14-52 lengths . 14-50 MSI . 14-50 transmit check digit . 14-52 multipoint-to-point communication . 4-18 N notational conventions . xviii O OCR default parameters . 13-2 parameters . 13-3 out of range indicator . 4-17 P pairing address . 4-14 bar code . 1-4, 2-2, 4-3 bar code format . 4-22 charging cradle . 1-6 connection maintenance interval . 4-23 cradle host . 4-4 lock override . 4-20 lost connection to host . 1-7 master . 3-4 master/slave setup . 4-6 methods . 4-21 modes . 4-2, 4-19 mulitpoint-to-point . 4-18 on contacts . 4-2 pin codes . 4-26 point-to-point . 4-18 radio communication . 1-11 SPP . 4-4 troubleshooting . 3-4, 3-5 unpair . 4-21 pairing beeper definitions . 4-3 parameter defaults all . A-1 IBM . 9-3 keyboard wedge . 8-3 radio communication . 4-2 RS-232 . 7-3 scanner emulation . 11-3 USB . 6-3 user preferences . 5-2 wand emulation . 10-3 parameters batch mode . 5-10, 5-11 battery reconditioning . 1-9 beep on insertion . 5-9 Bluetooth technology support . 4-8 IBM 468X/469X . 9-4 keyboard wedge . 8-4 radio communication . 4-4, 4-5 auto-reconnect interval . 4-14 batch mode . 5-10, 5-11 connection maintenance interval . 4-23 host types . 4-4, 4-5 pairing . 4-19 parameter broadcast . 4-19 reconnect attempt beep . 4-14 reconnect attempt interval . 4-15 RS-232 . 7-4 scanner to cradle support . 4-18 set defaults . 5-4 time delay to reduced power mode . 5-13 unpair . 4-21 USB . 6-4 wand emulation . 10-4 parser version ID . 16-16 parsing drivers license data . 16-1 parts cradle . 1-4, 1-5 scanner . 1-3 PDF417 bar codes . 14-69 PIN code static . 4-26 variable . 4-26 pinouts cradle signal descriptions . 3-10 point-to-point communication . 4-18 postal codes . 14-59 Australian postal . 14-62 Japan postal . 14-61 Netherlands KIX code . 14-62 transmit UK postal check digit . 14-61 transmit US postal check digit . 14-60 UK postal . 14-60 UPU FICS postal . 14-63 US planet . 14-59 US postnet . 14-59 USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail . 14-63 power . 1-7 via USB . 1-7 Q QR code bar codes . 14-72 quiet zone (leading margin) . 10-5 R radio communication Bluetooth Technology Profile support . 1-6, 1-11 defaults . 4-2 multipoint-to-point . 4-18 pairing . 1-11 parameters . 4-4, 4-5 point-to-point . 4-18 reconnect attempt . 4-15 reconnect attempt beep . 4-14 range indicator . 4-17 Index - 7 reconditioning, battery bar code . 1-9 reconnect attempt . 4-15 reconnect attempt beep . 4-14 removing battery . 1-8 replacing battery . 1-8 RS-232 connection . 7-2 RS-232 defaults . 7-3 RS-232 parameters . 7-4 S sample bar codes code 128 . C-2 code 39 . C-1 GS1 DataBar . C-3 interleaved 2 of 5 . C-2 UPC/EAN . C-1 scanner emulation defaults . 11-3 scanner parts . 1-3 scanner to cradle support . 4-18 scanner(s) to cradle support . 4-18 scanning . 2-5 errors . 5-2, 6-8, 8-6, 14-2 radio communications sequence example . 4-1 sequence example . 5-2, 14-1 scanning LED . 2-3 Serial Port Profile . 4-6 Serial Port Profile master . 4-4, 4-14, 4-19 Serial Port Profile slave . 4-4 service information . xix setup connecting a USB interface . 6-2 connecting an RS-232 interface . 7-2 connecting keyboard wedge interface . 8-2 connecting to an IBM 468X/469X host . 9-2 connecting using wand emulation . 10-2, 11-2 cradle . 1-6 inserting scanner in cradle . 1-10 installing the cable . 1-6 mounting cradle . 1-7 scanner . 1-6 supplying power . 1-7 unpacking . 1-2 signal descriptions . 3-10 slave . 3-4, 4-4, 4-6 specifications . 3-7 SPP . 4-6 SPP master . 4-4, 4-14, 4-19 SPP slave . 4-4 standard default parameters . F-1 stored data batch mode . 5-10 symbology default parameters . 14-2 Index - 8 Symbol DS6878 Product Reference Guide T technical specifications . 3-7 troubleshooting . 3-2 U unlocked pairing mode . 4-20 unpacking . 1-2 unpairing bar code . 4-21 UPC/EAN bar codes bookland EAN . 14-9 bookland ISBN . 14-21 check digit . 14-14, 14-15 convert UPC-E to UPC-A . 14-19 convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . 14-19 EAN zero extend . 14-20 EAN-13/JAN-13 . 14-9 EAN-8/JAN-8 . 14-8 ISSN EAN . 14-22 supplementals . 14-10 UCC coupon extended code . 14-22 UPC-A . 14-7 UPC-A preamble . 14-16 UPC-E . 14-7 UPC-E preamble . 14-17 UPC-E1 . 14-8 USB connection . 6-2 USB defaults . 6-3 USB parameters . 6-4 user preferences bar codes batch mode . 5-10, 5-11 beep on insertion . 5-9 set defaults . 5-4 time delay to reduced power mode . 5-13 user preferences defaults . 5-2 W wand emulation connection . 10-2, 11-2 wand emulation defaults . 10-3 wand emulation parameters . 10-4 Tell Us What You Think... Wed like to know what you think about this Manual. Please take a moment to fill out this questionnaire and fax this form to: (631) 627-7184, or mail to:
Motorola, Inc. One Motorola Plaza M/S B-10 Holtsville, NY 11742-1300 Attention: Technical Publications Manager Advanced Data Capture Division Important If you need product support, please call the appropriate customer support number for your area. Unfortunately, we cannot provide customer support at the fax number above Manual Title:___________________________________________
(please include revision level) How familiar were you with this product before using this manual?
Slightly familiar Very familiar Not at all familiar Did this manual meet your needs? If not, please explain. ______________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________ What topics need to be added to the index, if applicable?
______________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________ What topics do you feel need to be better discussed? Please be specific. ______________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________ What can we do to further improve our manuals?
______________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________ Thank you for your inputWe value your comments. Motorola, Inc. One Motorola Plaza Holtsville, New York 11742, USA 1-800-927-9626 http://www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo and Symbol and the Symbol logo are registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office. All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners. Motorola, Inc. 2009 72E-131700-01 Revision A - March 2010
| frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2010-03-01 | 2400 ~ 2483.5 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | Original Equipment |
| 2 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral |
| app s | Applicant Information | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 2 | Effective |
2010-03-01
|
||||
| 1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Zebra Technologies Corporation
|
||||
| 1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0015642663
|
||||
| 1 2 | Physical Address |
1 Zebra Plaza
|
||||
| 1 2 |
Holtsville, NY
|
|||||
| 1 2 |
United States
|
|||||
| app s | TCB Information | |||||
| 1 2 | TCB Application Email Address |
V******@babt.com
|
||||
| 1 2 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
| 1 2 |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
|||||
| app s | FCC ID | |||||
| 1 2 | Grantee Code |
UZ7
|
||||
| 1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
DS6878
|
||||
| app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
| 1 2 | Name |
L****** Z******
|
||||
| 1 2 | Title |
Regulatory Specialist
|
||||
| 1 2 | Telephone Number |
346-2********
|
||||
| 1 2 | Fax Number |
631-6********
|
||||
| 1 2 |
L******@zebra.com
|
|||||
| app s | Technical Contact | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
| 1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
| 1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
| 1 2 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 04/15/2010 | ||||
| if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
| app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
| 1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 2 | Equipment Class | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||||
| 1 2 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | |||||
| 1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Barcode scanner with integrated Bluetooth | ||||
| 1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
| 1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
| 1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
| 1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 2 | Grant Comments | Output power is conducted. This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any antenna or transmitter not described under this FCC id. | ||||
| 1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
| app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
| 1 2 | Firm Name |
TUV SUD Product Service
|
||||
| 1 2 | Name |
M****** J******
|
||||
| 1 2 | Telephone Number |
00-44********
|
||||
| 1 2 | Fax Number |
00-44********
|
||||
| 1 2 |
m******@tuv-sud.co.uk
|
|||||
| Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2400.00000000 | 2483.50000000 | 0.0139000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 1 | 15B | CC | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC